C141-E249-01EN
MHW2120BS, MHW2100BS, MHW2080BS
MHW2060BS, MHW2040BS
DISK DRIVES
PRODUCT MANUAL
Revision History
(1/1)
Revised section (*1)
(Added/Deleted/Altered)
Edition
01
Date
Details
2006-08-20
*1 Section(s) with asterisk (*) refer to the previous edition when those were deleted.
C141-E249
This page is intentionally left blank.
Preface
This manual describes MHW2120BS, MHW2100BS, MHW2080BS,
MHW2060BS, MHW2040BS model of the MHW Series, 2.5-inch hard disk
drives. These drives have a built-in controller that is compatible with the Serial-
ATA interface.
This manual describes the specifications and functions of the drives and explains
in detail how to incorporate the drives into user systems. This manual assumes
that the reader has a basic knowledge of hard disk drives and their
implementations in computer systems.
This manual consists of seven chapters and sections explaining the special
terminology and abbreviations used in this manual:
Overview of Manual
CHAPTER 1
This chapter gives an overview of the disk drive and describes their features.
CHAPTER 2 Device Configuration
Device Overview
This chapter describes the internal configurations of the disk drive and the
configuration of the systems in which they operate.
CHAPTER 3
Installation Conditions
This chapter describes the external dimensions, installation conditions, and switch
settings of the disk drive.
CHAPTER 4
This chapter describes the operation theory of the disk drive.
CHAPTER 5 Interface
This chapter describes the interface specifications of the disk drive.
CHAPTER 6 Operations
Theory of Device Operation
This chapter describes the operations of the disk drive.
Glossary
The glossary describes the technical terms that need to be understood to read this
manual.
Acronyms and Abbreviations
This section gives the meanings of the definitions used in this manual.
C141-E249
i
Preface
Conventions for Alert Messages
This manual uses the following conventions to show the alert messages. An alert
message consists of an alert signal and alert statements. The alert signal consists
of an alert symbol and a signal word or just a signal word.
The following are the alert signals and their meanings:
This indicates a hazardous situation could result in
minor or moderate personal injury if the user does
not perform the procedure correctly. This alert signal
also indicates that damages to the product or other
property may occur if the user does not perform the
procedure correctly.
This indicates information that could help the user
use the product more efficiently.
In the text, the alert signal is centered, followed below by the indented message.
A wider line space precedes and follows the alert message to show where the alert
message begins and ends. The following is an example:
(Example)
Data corruption: Avoid mounting the disk drive near strong
magnetic sources such as loud speakers. Ensure that the disk drive
is not affected by external magnetic fields.
The main alert messages in the text are also listed in the “Important Alert Items.”
Operating Environment
This product is designed to be used in offices or computer rooms.
Conventions
An MHW series device is sometimes simply referred to as a "hard disk drive,"
"HDD," "drive," or "device" in this document.
Decimal numbers are represented normally.
Hexadecimal numbers are represented as shown in the following examples:
X'17B9', 17B9h, 17B9H, or 17B9H.
Binary numbers are represented as shown in the following examples: 010 or 010b.
Serial-ATA may be referred to as "SATA".
ii
C141-E249
Preface
Attention
Please forward any comments you may have regarding this manual.
To make this manual easier for users to understand, opinions from readers are
needed. Please write your opinions or requests on the Comment at the back of this
manual and forward it to the address described in the sheet.
Liability Exception
“Disk drive defects” refers to defects that involve adjustment, repair, or
replacement.
Fujitsu is not liable for any other disk drive defects, such as those caused by user
misoperation or mishandling, inappropriate operating environments, defects in the
power supply or cable, problems of the host system, or other causes outside the
disk drive.
C141-E249
iii
This page is intentionally left blank.
Important Alert Items
Important Alert Messages
The important alert messages in this manual are as follows:
A hazardous situation could result in minor or moderate personal
injury if the user does not perform the procedure correctly. Also,
damage to the product or other property, may occur if the user does not
perform the procedure correctly.
Task
Alert message
Page
3-7
Normal Operation
Data corruption: Avoid mounting the disk near strong
magnetic sources such as loud speakers. Ensure that the disk
drive is not affected by external magnetic fields.
Damage: Do not press the cover of the disk drive. Pressing
it too hard, the cover and the spindle motor contact, which
may cause damage to the disk drive.
Static: When handling the device, disconnect the body
ground (500 kΩ or greater). Do not touch the printed circuit
board, but hold it by the edges.
C141-E249
v
This page is intentionally left blank.
Manual Organization
MHW2120BS, MHW2100BS,
MHW2080BS, MHW2060BS,
MHW2040BS
• Device Overview
• Device Configuration
• Installation Conditions
• Theory of Device Operation
• Interface
DISK DRIVES
PRODUCT MANUAL
(C141-E249)
• Operations
<This manual>
MHW2120BS, MHW2100BS,
MHW2080BS, MHW2060BS,
MHW2040BS
• Maintenance and Diagnosis
• Removal and Replacement Procedure
DISK DRIVES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(C141-F083)
C141-E249
vii
This page is intentionally left blank.
Contents
CHAPTER 1 Device Overview ....................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Features .............................................................................................................. 1-2
1.1.1 Functions and performance ..................................................................... 1-2
1.1.2 Adaptability............................................................................................. 1-2
1.1.3 Interface................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2 Device Specifications......................................................................................... 1-4
1.2.1 Specifications summary .......................................................................... 1-4
1.2.2 Model and product number ..................................................................... 1-5
1.3 Power Requirements .......................................................................................... 1-6
1.4 Environmental Specifications............................................................................. 1-9
1.5 Acoustic Noise ................................................................................................. 1-10
1.6 Shock and Vibration......................................................................................... 1-10
1.7 Reliability......................................................................................................... 1-11
1.8 Error Rate......................................................................................................... 1-12
1.9 Media Defects .................................................................................................. 1-12
1.10 Load/Unload Function.................................................................................... 1-12
1.10.1 Recommended power-off sequence ................................................... 1-13
1.11 Advanced Power Management (APM) .......................................................... 1-13
1.12 Interface Power Management (IPM)............................................................. 1-15
1.12.1 Host-initiated interface power management (HIPM)......................... 1-15
1.12.2 Device-initiated interface power management (DIPM) ..................... 1-15
CHAPTER 2 Device Configuration................................................................ 2-1
2.1 Device Configuration ........................................................................................ 2-2
C141-E249
ix
Contents
2.2 System Configuration........................................................................................2-3
2.2.1 SATA interface .....................................................................................2-3
2.2.2 Drive connection ...................................................................................2-3
CHAPTER 3 Installation Conditions..............................................................3-1
3.1 Dimensions........................................................................................................3-2
3.2 Mounting ...........................................................................................................3-3
3.3 Connections with Host System..........................................................................3-9
3.3.1 Device connector...................................................................................3-9
3.3.2 Signal segment and power supply segment.........................................3-10
3.3.3 Connector specifications for host system............................................3-10
3.3.4 SATA interface cable connection .......................................................3-11
3.3.5 Note about SATA interface cable connection.....................................3-11
CHAPTER 4 Theory of Device Operation......................................................4-1
4.1 Outline................................................................................................................4-2
4.2 Subassemblies.....................................................................................................4-2
4.2.1 Disk .........................................................................................................4-2
4.2.2 Spindle.....................................................................................................4-2
4.2.3 Actuator...................................................................................................4-2
4.2.4 Air filter...................................................................................................4-3
4.3 Circuit Configuration..........................................................................................4-3
4.4 Power-on Sequence ............................................................................................4-6
4.5 Self-calibration ...................................................................................................4-8
4.5.1 Self-calibration contents..........................................................................4-8
4.5.2 Execution timing of self-calibration........................................................4-9
4.5.3 Command processing during self-calibration..........................................4-9
4.6 Read/write Circuit ............................................................................................4-10
4.6.1 Read/write preamplifier (PreAMP) .......................................................4-10
4.6.2 Write circuit...........................................................................................4-10
4.6.3 Read circuit............................................................................................4-11
x
C141-E249
Contents
4.6.4 Digital PLL circuit ................................................................................ 4-12
4.7 Servo Control ................................................................................................... 4-13
4.7.1 Servo control circuit.............................................................................. 4-13
4.7.2 Data-surface servo format ..................................................................... 4-15
4.7.3 Servo frame format................................................................................ 4-17
4.7.4 Actuator motor control.......................................................................... 4-18
4.7.5 Spindle motor control............................................................................ 4-19
CHAPTER 5 Interface..................................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Physical Interface.............................................................................................. 5-2
5.1.1 Interface signals .................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.2 Signal interface regulation .................................................................... 5-4
5.1.3 Electrical specifications ........................................................................ 5-7
5.1.4 Connector pinouts............................................................................... 5-10
5.1.5 P11 function........................................................................................ 5-11
5.1.6 Hot Plug .............................................................................................. 5-13
5.2 Logical Interface ............................................................................................. 5-14
5.2.1 Communication layers ........................................................................ 5-15
5.2.2 Outline of the Shadow Block Register................................................ 5-16
5.2.3 Outline of the frame information structure (FIS)................................ 5-17
5.2.4 Shadow block registers ....................................................................... 5-24
5.3 Host Commands .............................................................................................. 5-29
5.3.1 Command code and parameters .......................................................... 5-29
5.3.2 Command descriptions........................................................................ 5-32
(1) RECALIBRATE (X’10’ to X’1F’) ............................................... 5-33
(2) READ SECTOR(S) (X’20’ or X’21’)......................................... 5-34
(3) WRITE SECTOR(S) (X’30’ or X’31’)........................................ 5-36
(4) WRITE VERIFY (X’3C’)............................................................ 5-38
(5) READ VERIFY SECTOR(S) (X’40’ or X’41’) .......................... 5-40
(6) SEEK (X’70’ to X’7F’)................................................................. 5-42
(7) EXECUTE DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC (X’90’)............................... 5-43
(8) INITIALIZE DEVICE PARAMETERS (X’91’).......................... 5-44
(9) DOWNLOAD MICROCODE (X’92’) ......................................... 5-45
(10) STANDBY IMMEDIATE (X’94’ or X’E0’)................................ 5-47
C141-E249
xi
Contents
(11) IDLE IMMEDIATE (X’95’ or X’E1’) /UNLOAD
IMMEDIATE (X’95’ or X’E1’).................................................... 5-48
(12) STANDBY (X’96’ or X’E2’)........................................................ 5-50
(13) IDLE (X’97’ or X’E3’) ................................................................. 5-51
(14) CHECK POWER MODE (X’98’ or X’E5’) ................................. 5-53
(15) SLEEP (X’99’ or X’E6’).............................................................. 5-54
(16) SMART (X’B0’) ........................................................................... 5-55
(17) DEVICE CONFIGURATION (X'B1') .......................................... 5-85
(18) READ MULTIPLE (X’C4’).......................................................... 5-90
(19) WRITE MULTIPLE (X’C5’)........................................................ 5-93
(20) SET MULTIPLE MODE (X’C6’)................................................. 5-95
(21) READ DMA (X’C8’ or X’C9’)..................................................... 5-97
(22) WRITE DMA (X’CA’ or X’CB’) ................................................. 5-99
(23) READ BUFFER (X’E4’)............................................................. 5-101
(24) FLUSH CACHE (X’E7’) ........................................................... 5-102
(25) WRITE BUFFER (X’E8’)........................................................... 5-103
(26) IDENTIFY DEVICE (X’EC’)..................................................... 5-104
(27) IDENTIFY DEVICE DMA (X’EE’).......................................... 5-105
(28) SET FEATURES (X’EF’)........................................................... 5-119
(29) SECURITY SET PASSWORD (X’F1’) ..................................... 5-126
(30) SECURITY UNLOCK(X’F2’).................................................... 5-128
(31) SECURITY ERASE PREPARE (X’F3’).................................... 5-130
(32) SECURITY ERASE UNIT (X’F4’)............................................ 5-131
(33) SECURITY FREEZE LOCK (X’F5’)......................................... 5-132
(34) SECURITY DISABLE PASSWORD (X’F6’)............................ 5-134
(35) READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS (X’F8’)................................ 5-136
(36) SET MAX (X’F9’) ...................................................................... 5-137
(37) READ SECTOR (S) EXT (X’24’) .............................................. 5-143
(38) READ DMA EXT (X’25’).......................................................... 5-144
(39) READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS EXT (X’27’)....................... 5-145
(40) READ MULTIPLE EXT (X’29’)................................................ 5-146
(41) READ LOG EXT (X'2F') ............................................................ 5-147
(42) WRITE SECTOR (S) EXT (X’34’) ............................................ 5-153
(43) WRITE DMA EXT (X’35’) ........................................................ 5-154
(44) SET MAX ADDRESS EXT (X’37’)........................................... 5-155
(45) WRITE MULTIPLE EXT (X’39’).............................................. 5-157
xii
C141-E249
Contents
(46) WRITE LOG EXT (X'3F') .......................................................... 5-158
(47) READ VERIFY SECTOR (S) EXT (X’42’).............................. 5-162
(48) FLUSH CACHE EXT (X’EA’) ................................................. 5-163
(49) WRITE MULTIPLE FUA EXT (X'CE')..................................... 5-164
(50) WRITE DMA FUA EXT (X'3D') ............................................... 5-165
(51) READ FP DMA QUEUED (X'60')............................................. 5-166
(52) WRITE FP DMA QUEUED (X'61') ........................................... 5-167
5.3.3 Error posting ..................................................................................... 5-168
5.4 Command Protocol........................................................................................ 5-170
5.4.1 Non-data command protocol............................................................. 5-170
5.4.2 PIO data-in command protocol......................................................... 5-172
5.4.3 PIO data-out command protocol....................................................... 5-173
5.4.4 DMA data-in command protocol ...................................................... 5-175
5.4.5 DMA data-out command protocol .................................................... 5-176
5.4.6 Native Command Queuing protocol ................................................. 5-177
5.5 Power-on and COMRESET .......................................................................... 5-180
CHAPTER 6 Operations................................................................................. 6-1
6.1 Reset and Diagnosis .......................................................................................... 6-2
6.1.1 Response to power-on........................................................................... 6-2
6.1.2 Response to COMRESET..................................................................... 6-4
6.1.3 Response to a software reset ................................................................. 6-7
6.2 Power Save........................................................................................................ 6-8
6.2.1 Power save mode .................................................................................. 6-8
6.2.2 Power commands................................................................................ 6-10
6.3 Power Save Controlled by Interface Power Management (IPM).................... 6-11
6.3.1 Power save mode of the interface ....................................................... 6-11
6.4 Read-ahead Cache........................................................................................... 6-13
6.4.1 Data buffer structure ........................................................................... 6-13
6.4.2 Caching operation ............................................................................... 6-14
6.4.3 Using the read segment buffer ............................................................ 6-16
6.5 Write Cache..................................................................................................... 6-20
C141-E249
xiii
Contents
6.5.1 Cache operation...................................................................................6-20
Glossary ...........................................................................................................GL-1
Acronyms and Abbreviations.........................................................................AB-1
Index ................................................................................................................. IN-1
xiv
C141-E249
Contents
Illustrations
Figures
Figure 1.1 Permissible range of +5V rise slope..................................................... 1-6
Figure 1.2 The example of negative voltage waveform at +5 V when
power is turned off ............................................................................... 1-7
Figure 1.3 Current fluctuation (Typ.) at +5 V when power is turned on............... 1-9
Figure 2.1 Disk drive outerview ............................................................................ 2-2
Figure 2.2 Drive system configuration .................................................................. 2-3
Figure 3.1 Dimensions........................................................................................... 3-2
Figure 3.2 Mounting frame structure..................................................................... 3-4
Figure 3.3 Location of breather ............................................................................. 3-5
Figure 3.4 Surface cover temperature measurement points................................... 3-6
Figure 3.5 Service area .......................................................................................... 3-7
Figure 3.6 Handling cautions................................................................................. 3-8
Figure 3.7 Connector locations.............................................................................. 3-9
Figure 3.8 Power supply pins (CN1) ................................................................... 3-10
Figure 4.1 Power supply configuration.................................................................. 4-4
Figure 4.2 Circuit configuration ............................................................................ 4-5
Figure 4.3 Power-on operation sequence............................................................... 4-7
Figure 4.4 Read/write circuit block diagram ....................................................... 4-10
Figure 4.5 Frequency characteristic of programmable filter................................ 4-11
Figure 4.6 Block diagram of servo control circuit............................................... 4-13
Figure 4.7 Physical sector servo configuration on disk surface........................... 4-16
Figure 4.8 Servo frame format............................................................................. 4-17
Figure 5.1 Interface signals.................................................................................... 5-2
Figure 5.2 Example of the circuit for driving Ready LED .................................. 5-12
Figure 5.3 Conceptual diagram of communication layers................................... 5-14
Figure 5.4 Register - Host to Device FIS layout.................................................. 5-17
Figure 5.5 Register - Device to Host FIS layout.................................................. 5-18
Figure 5.6 DMA Active - Device to Host FIS layout.......................................... 5-18
Figure 5.7 DMA Setup - Device to Host or Host to Device FIS layout .............. 5-19
Figure 5.8 BIST Active - Bidirectional FIS layout.............................................. 5-20
Figure 5.9 Data FIS (Bidirectional) layout .......................................................... 5-21
Figure 5.10 PIO Setup - Device to Host FIS layout ............................................ 5-21
C141-E249
xv
Contents
Figure 5.11 Set Device Bits FIS...........................................................................5-23
Figure 5.12 Execution example of READ MULTIPLE command......................5-91
Figure 5.13 Non-data command protocol ..........................................................5-171
Figure 5.14 PIO data-in command protocol.......................................................5-173
Figure 5.15 PIO data-out command protocol.....................................................5-174
Figure 5.16 DMA data-in command protocol....................................................5-175
Figure 5.17 DMA data-out command protocol..................................................5-176
Figure 5.18 READ FP DMA QUEUED command protocol .............................5-178
Figure 5.19 WRITE FP DMA QUEUED command protocol ...........................5-179
Figure 5.20 Power-on sequence.........................................................................5-180
Figure 5.21 COMRESET sequence ...................................................................5-181
Figure 6.1 Response to power-on (when the host is powered on earlier
than the device) ....................................................................................6-2
Figure 6.2 Response to power-on (when the device is powered on
earlier than the host).............................................................................6-3
Figure 6.3 Response to COMRESET ....................................................................6-4
Figure 6.4 Response to a software reset.................................................................6-7
Figure 6.5 Data buffer structure...........................................................................6-13
xvi
C141-E249
Contents
Tables
Table 1.1 Specifications ........................................................................................ 1-4
Table 1.2 Examples of model names and product numbers .................................. 1-5
Table 1.3 Current and power dissipation............................................................... 1-8
Table 1.4 Environmental specifications................................................................. 1-9
Table 1.5 Acoustic noise specification ................................................................ 1-10
Table 1.6 Shock and vibration specification........................................................ 1-10
Table 1.7 Advanced Power Management ............................................................ 1-14
Table 1.8 Interface power management............................................................... 1-16
Table 3.1 Surface temperature measurement points and standard values.............. 3-6
Table 3.2 The recommended connector specifications for the host
system.................................................................................................. 3-10
Table 5.1 Physical Layer Electrical Requirements................................................ 5-7
Table 5.2 Connector pinouts................................................................................ 5-10
Table 5.3 Requirements for P11 as an output pin................................................ 5-11
Table 5.4 Shadow Block Register........................................................................ 5-16
Table 5.5 BIST combinations .............................................................................. 5-20
Table 5.6 Command code and parameters........................................................... 5-29
Table 5.7 Diagnostic code ................................................................................... 5-43
Table 5.8 Operation of DOWNLOAD MICROCODE........................................ 5-45
Table 5.9 Example of rewriting procedure of data 512K Bytes
(80000h Bytes) of microcode............................................................. 5-46
Table 5.10 Features Field values (subcommands) and functions ........................ 5-56
Table 5.11 Format of device attribute value data ................................................ 5-60
Table 5.12 Format of guarantee failure threshold value data .............................. 5-60
Table 5.13 Off-line data collection status............................................................ 5-63
Table 5.14 Self-test execution status ................................................................... 5-63
Table 5.15 Off-line data collection capability ..................................................... 5-64
Table 5.16 Failure prediction capability flag....................................................... 5-64
Table 5.17 Drive error logging capability ........................................................... 5-64
Table 5.18 Log Directory Data Format................................................................ 5-65
Table 5.19 Data format of SMART Summary Error Log.................................... 5-66
Table 5.20 Data format of SMART Comprehensive Error Log .......................... 5-68
Table 5.21 SMART self-test log data format....................................................... 5-69
Table 5.22 Selective self-test log data structure .................................................. 5-70
Table 5.23 Selective self-test feature flags .......................................................... 5-71
Table 5.24 SCT command and the function ........................................................ 5-72
Table 5.25 Format of SCT STATUS Response................................................... 5-74
Table 5.26 SCT STATUS code ........................................................................... 5-76
C141-E249
xvii
Contents
Table 5.27 Action code........................................................................................5-78
Table 5.28 WRITE SAME...................................................................................5-78
Table 5.29 ERROR RECOVERY CONTROL....................................................5-79
Table 5.30 FEATURE CONTROL COMMAND................................................5-80
Table 5.31 SCT DATA TABLE ..........................................................................5-81
Table 5.32 HAD Temperature..............................................................................5-82
Table 5.33 DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY data structure .................5-88
Table 5.34 Information to be read by IDENTIFY DEVICE command .............5-106
Table 5.35 Features field values and settable modes .........................................5-119
Table 5.36 Write-Read-Verify feature sector counts .........................................5-125
Table 5.37 Contents of SECURITY SET PASSWORD data............................5-126
Table 5.38 Relationship between combination of Identifier and Security
level, and operation of the lock function ........................................5-126
Table 5.39 Contents of security password .........................................................5-134
Table 5.40 Data format of Read Log Ext log page 10h .....................................5-149
Table 5.41 Tag field information .......................................................................5-149
Table 5.42 Data format of Read Log Ext log page 11h .....................................5-150
Table 5.43 Counter Identifier information.........................................................5-150
Table 5.44 Command code and parameters .......................................................5-168
xviii
C141-E249
CHAPTER 1 Device Overview
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
Features
Device Specifications
Power Requirements
Environmental Specifications
Acoustic Noise
Shock and Vibration
Reliability
Error Rate
Media Defects
1.10 Load/Unload Function
1.11 Advanced Power Management (APM)
1.12 Interface Power Management (IPM)
Overview and features are described in this chapter, and specifications and power
requirement are described.
The disk drive is 2.5-inch hard disk drives with built-in disk controllers. These
disk drives use the SATA interface protocol which has a high-speed interface data
transfer rate.
C141-E249
1-1
Device Overview
1.1 Features
1.1.1 Functions and performance
The following features of the disk drive are described.
(1) Compact
The disk drive has up to 2 disks of 65 mm (2.5 inches) diameter, and its height is
9.5 mm (0.374 inch).
(2) Environmental Protection
The disk drive comply with the RoHS (Restriction of the use of certain Hazardous
Substances in electrical and electronic equipment) directive issued by European
Union (EU).
(3) Large capacity
The disk drive can record up to 60 GB (formatted) on one disk using the RLL
recording method and 30 recording zone technology. The disk drive has a
formatted capacity of 120 GB (MHW2120BS), 100 GB (MHW2100BS), 80 GB
(MHW2080BS), 60 GB (MHW2060BS) and 40 GB (MHW2040BS) respectively.
(4) High-speed Transfer rate
The disk drive (the MHW2xxxBS Series) has an internal data rate up to
61.3 MB/s. The disk drive supports an external data rate 1.5Gbps (150MB/s)
(Serial-ATA Generation-1). And the disk drive realizes a high performance by
high-speed transfer rate combined with Native Command Queuing (NCQ).
(5) Average positioning time
Use of a rotary voice coil motor in the head positioning mechanism greatly
increases the positioning speed. The average positioning time is 12 ms (at read).
1.1.2 Adaptability
(1) Power save mode
The disk drive is ideal for applications since it supports the power save mode
function that works in each of the Idle, Standby, and Sleep modes and has the
Partial and Slumber interface power management functions. And automatically
power down by APM function makes the disk drive ideal for mobile use where
power consumption is a factor.
(2) Temperature range
The disk drive can be used temperature range (5 °C to 60°C at DE surface).
(For details of the reliability for each temperature range, refer to the Section 1.7,
"Reliability.")
1-2
C141-E249
1.1 Features
(3) Low noise and vibration
In Ready status (while the device is waiting for any commands), the Sound Power
level of the disk drives in idle mode is 2.0B [MHW2040BS, MHW2060BS] / 2.4B
[MHW2080BS, MHW2100BS, MHW2120BS]. The Sound Pressure level is
22dB [MHW2040BS, MHW2060BS] / 28dB [MHW2080BS, MHW2100BS,
MHW2120BS], as measured 0.3 m from the drive in Idle mode.
(4) High resistance against shock
The Load/Unload mechanism is highly resistant against non-operation shock up to
8820 m/s2 (900G).
1.1.3 Interface
(1) Connection to SATA interface
The disk drive has built-in controllers compatible with the SATA interface.
(2) Data buffer
The disk drive uses 8MB data buffer to transfer data between the host and the disk
media.
In combination with the read-ahead cache system described in item (3) and the
write cache described in item (6), the buffer contributes to efficient I/O processing.
(3) Read-ahead cache system
After the execution of a disk read command, the disk drive automatically reads the
subsequent data block and writes it to the data buffer (read ahead operation). This
cache system enables fast data access. The next disk read command would normally
cause another disk access. But, if the read ahead data corresponds to the data
requested by the next read command, the data in the buffer can be transferred instead.
(4) Error correction and retry by ECC
If a recoverable error occurs, the disk drive itself attempts error recovery. The
ECC has improved buffer error correction for correctable data errors.
(5) Self-diagnosis
The disk drive has a diagnostic function to check operation of the controller and disk
drive. Executing a diagnostic function of the smart command invokes self-diagnosis.
(6) Write cache
When the disk drive receives a write command, the disk drive posts the command
completion at completion of transferring data to the data buffer completion of
writing to the disk media. This feature reduces the access time at writing.
C141-E249
1-3
Device Overview
1.2 Device Specifications
1.2.1 Specifications summary
Table 1.1 shows the specifications of the disk drives.
Table 1.1 Specifications (1/2)
MHW2120BS MHW2100BS MHW2080BS MHW2060BS MHW2040BS
Format Capacity (*1, *2)
Number of Sectors (User)
Bytes per Sector
120 GB
100 GB
80 GB
60 GB
40 GB
234,441,648 195,371,568 156,301,488 117,210,240 78,140,160
512 bytes
5,400 rpm 1%
5.56 ms
Rotational Speed
Average Latency
Positioning time (read and seek)
1.5 ms (typ.)
Read: 12 ms (typ.)
22 ms (typ.)
•
•
•
Minimum (Track-Track)
Average
Maximum (Full)
Start time
Interface
4.0 sec (typ.)
Compliant with ATA/ATAPI-8, SATA I High Speed Serialized AT
Attachment 1.0a, SATA II Ext to SATA1.0a,
SATA II Electrical Spec.1.0
Data Transfer Rate (*2)
61.3MB/s Max.
•
•
To/From Media
To/From Host
1.5 Gbps (150 MB/s)
Data Buffer Size (*3)
8 MB (8,388,608 bytes)
Physical Dimensions
9.5 mm × 100.0 mm × 70.0 mm (*4)
(Height × Width × Depth)
Weight
101 g (Max.)
*1: Capacity under the LBA mode.
*2: 1 GB is equal to 1,000,000,000 bytes and 1 MB is equal to 1,000,000 bytes.
*3: 1 MB is equal to 1,048,576 bytes.
*4: The value of Depth (=100.0 mm) does not include PCBA (Printed Circuit Board Assembly).
For details, see Section 3.1.
Table 1.1 lists the formatted capacity, number of logical cylinders, number of
heads, and number of sectors of every model for which the CHS mode has been
selected using the BIOS setup utility on the host.
1-4
C141-E249
1.2 Device Specifications
Table 1.1 Specifications (2/2)
Model
Capacity
No. of Cylinder
No. of Heads
No. of Sectors
MHW2120BS
MHW2100BS
MHW2080BS
MHW2060BS
MHW2040BS
8.45 GB
8.45 GB
8.45 GB
8.45 GB
8.45 GB
16,383
16,383
16,383
16,383
16,383
16
16
16
16
16
63
63
63
63
63
1.2.2 Model and product number
Table 1.2 lists the model names and product numbers of the disk drive.
The model name does not necessarily correspond to the product number as listed
in Table 1.2 since some models have been customized and have specifications that
are different from those for the standard model.
If a disk drive is ordered as a replacement drive, the product number must be the
same as that of the drive being replaced.
Table 1.2 Examples of model names and product numbers
Capacity
Model Name
Mounting screw
Order No.
CA06820-B704
(user area)
120 GB
100 GB
80 GB
MHW2120BS
MHW2100BS
MHW2080BS
MHW2060BS
MHW2040BS
M3 Depth 3
M3 Depth 3
M3 Depth 3
M3 Depth 3
M3 Depth 3
CA06820-B706
CA06820-B708
CA06820-B710
CA06820-B712
60 GB
40 GB
C141-E249
1-5
Device Overview
1.3 Power Requirements
(1) Input Voltage
•
•
+ 5 V
5 %
It is unnecessary for this drive to supply +3.3 V and +12 V power supplies.
(2) Ripple
+5 V
Maximum
Frequency
100 mV (peak to peak)
DC to 1 MHz
(3) Slope of an input voltage at rise
The following figure shows the restriction of the slope which is +5 V input voltage
at rise. The permissible range of +5 V slope is from 1V/20 µsec to 1V/20 msec,
under the voltage range is between 2.0V and 4.5V.
Figure 1.1 Permissible range of +5V rise slope
1-6
C141-E249
1.3 Power Requirements
(4) A negative voltage like the bottom figure isn't to occur at +5 V when power is turned off
and, a thing with no ringing.
Permissible level: − 0.2 V
5
4
3
2
1
0
-1
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
Time [ms]
Figure 1.2 The example of negative voltage waveform at +5 V
when power is turned off
C141-E249
1-7
Device Overview
(5) Current Requirements and Power Dissipation
Table 1.3 lists the current and power dissipation (typical).
Table 1.3 Current and power dissipation
Typical RMS Current
Typical Power (*3)
Spin up (*1)
Idle (*6)
1.0 A
120 mA
380 mA
420 mA
26 mA
26 mA
5.0 W
0.60 W
1.9 W
R/W (on track) (*2)
Seek (*5)
2.1 W
Standby (*6)
Sleep (*6)
0.13 W
0.13 W
Energy
Efficiency (*4)
0.0050 W/GB (rank E / MHW2120BS)
0.0060 W/GB (rank E / MHW2100BS)
0.0075 W/GB (rank E / MHW2080BS)
0.0100 W/GB (rank D / MHW2060BS)
0.0150 W/GB (rank D / MHW2040BS)
—
*1
*2
Maximum current and power at starting spindle motor.
Current and power level when the operation (command) that accompanies a
transfer of 63 sectors is executed 3 times in 100 ms
*3
*4
Power requirements reflect typical values for +5 V power.
Energy efficiency based on the Law concerning the Rational Use of Energy
indicates the value obtained by dividing power consumption by the storage
capacity. (Japan only)
*5
*6
The seek average current is specified based on three operations per 100
msec.
IPM mode: Slumber mode.
1-8
C141-E249
1.4 Environmental Specifications
(6) Current fluctuation (Typ.) at +5 V when power is turned on
Figure 1.3 Current fluctuation (Typ.) at +5 V when power is turned on
1.4 Environmental Specifications
Table 1.4 lists the environmental specifications.
Table 1.4 Environmental specifications
Item
Specification
Temperature
• Operating
5 °C to 55 °C (ambient)
5 °C to 60 °C (disk enclosure surface)
–40 °C to 65 °C
• Non-operating
• Thermal Gradient
Humidity
20 °C/h or less
• Operating
• Non-operating
• Maximum Wet Bulb
8 % to 90 % RH (Non-condensing)
5 % to 95 % RH (Non-condensing)
29 °C (Operating)
40 °C (Non-operating)
Altitude (relative to sea level)
• Operating
• Non-operating
–300 to 3,000 m
–300 to 12,000 m
C141-E249
1-9
Device Overview
1.5 Acoustic Noise
Table 1.5 lists the acoustic noise specification.
Table 1.5 Acoustic noise specification
Item
• Idle mode (DRIVE READY)
Specification
Sound Power
2.0B [MHW2060BS / MHW2040BS]
2.4B [MHW2120BS / MHW2100BS / MHW2080BS]
Sound Pressure (at 0.3m)
22dB [MHW2060BS / MHW2040BS]
28dB [MHW2120BS / MHW2100BS / MHW2080BS]
Note:
Measure the noise from the cover top surface.
1.6 Shock and Vibration
Table 1.6 lists the shock and vibration specification.
Table 1.6 Shock and vibration specification
Item
Specification
Vibration (Swept sine, 1/4 octave per minute)
• Operating
5 to 500 Hz, 9.8m/s2 0-peak (1G 0-peak)
(without non-recovered errors)
Non-operating
5 to 500 Hz, 49m/s2 0-peak (5G 0-peak)
(no damage)
Shock (half-sine pulse)
• Operating
2940 m/s2 0-peak (300G 0-peak)
2ms duration
(without non-recovered errors)
• Non-operating
8820 m/s2 0-peak (900G 0-peak)
1ms duration
1176 m/s2 0-peak (120G 0-peak)
11ms duration
(no damage)
1-10
C141-E249
1.7 Reliability
1.7 Reliability
(1) Mean time between failures (MTBF)
Conditions of 500,000 h Power-on time 24H/day or less
Operating time 50 % or less of power-on time
Temperature
Humidity
5 to 45 °C (DE surface)
8 to 90 % (ambient)
But humidity bulb temperature
29 °C or less
Conditions of 300,000 h Power-on time 24H/day or less
Operating time 50 % or less of power-on time
Temperature
Humidity
5 to 60 °C (DE surface)
8 to 90 % (ambient)
But humidity bulb temperature
29 °C or less
MTBF is defined as follows:
Total operation time in all fields
MTBF=
(H)
number of device failure in all fields (*1)
*1 “Disk drive defects” refers to defects that involve repair, readjustment, or
replacement. Disk drive defects do not include failures caused by external
factors, such as damage caused by handling, inappropriate operating
environments, defects in the power supply host system, or interface cable.
(2) Mean time to repair (MTTR)
The mean time to repair (MTTR) is 30 minutes or less, if repaired by a specialist
maintenance staff member.
(3) Service life
In situations where management and handling are correct, the disk drives requires
no overhaul for five years or 30,000 hours of operation, whichever occurs first,
when the DE surface temperature is less than 45°C. When the DE surface
temperature exceeds 45°C, the disk drives requires no overhaul for five years or
20,000 hours of operation, whichever occurs first.
Refer to item (3) in Subsection 3.2 for the measurement point of the DE surface
temperature. The operating conditions of Service life are based on the equal
conditions with MTBF.
(4) Data assurance in the event of power failure
Except for the data block being written to, the data on the disk media is assured in
the event of any power supply abnormalities. This does not include power supply
abnormalities during disk media initialization (formatting) or processing of
defects (alternative block assignment).
C141-E249
1-11
Device Overview
1.8 Error Rate
Known defects, for which alternative blocks can be assigned, are not included in
the error rate count below. It is assumed that the data blocks to be accessed are
evenly distributed on the disk media.
(1) Unrecoverable read error
Read errors that cannot be recovered by maximum read retries of drive without
user’s retry and ECC corrections shall occur no more than 1 time when reading
data of 1014 bits. Read retries are executed according to the disk drive’s error
recovery procedure, and include read retries accompanying head offset operations.
(2) Positioning error
Positioning (seek) errors that can be recovered by one retry shall occur no more
than 10 times in 107 seek operations.
1.9 Media Defects
Defective sectors are replaced with alternates when the disk drive is formatted
prior to shipment from the factory (low level format). Thus, the hosts see a defect-
free device.
Alternate sectors are automatically accessed by the disk drive. The user need not
be concerned with access to alternate sectors.
1.10 Load/Unload Function
The Load/Unload function is a mechanism that loads the head on the disk and
unloads the head from the disk.
The product supports a minimum of 600,000 Load/Unload cycles.
Unload is a normal head unloading operation and the commands listed below are
executed.
•
•
•
•
•
•
STANDBY command issued
STANDBY IMMEDIATE command issued
SLEEP command issued
IDLE IMMEDIATE command (with unload feature) issued
Power Mode shifted with APM or APS feature.
SLUMBER signal transferred
(PMREQ_S signal is transferred from the host or the drive, and the host
responds with PMACK signal.)
1-12
C141-E249
1.11 Advanced Power Management (APM)
Emergency Unload other than Unload is performed when the power is shut down
while the heads are still loaded on the disk.
The product supports the Emergency Unload a minimum of 20,000 times.
When the power is shut down, the controlled Unload cannot be executed.
Therefore, the number of Emergency other than Unload is specified.
1.10.1 Recommended power-off sequence
We recommend cutting the power supply of the HDD for this device after the
Head Unload operation completes. The recommended power supply cutting
sequence for this device is as follows:
1) Disk Flush
Flush Cache command execution.
2) Head Unload
Standby Immediate command execution.
3) Wait Status
Checking whether bit 7 of the status register was set to '0'.
(wait to complete STANDBY IMMEDIATE command)
4) HDD power supply cutting
1.11 Advanced Power Management (APM)
The disk drive automatically shifts to the power saving mode according to the
setting of the APM mode under the idle condition.
The APM mode can be chosen with a Sector Count register of the SET
FEATURES (EF) command.
The disk drive complies with the three kinds of APM modes that a command from
the host is required.
FR = 05h : Enable APM
SC = C0h - FEh :
SC = 80h - BFh :
SC = 01h - 7Fh :
Mode-0 Active Idle → Low Power Idle
Mode-1 Active Idle → Low Power Idle (Default)
Mode-2 Active Idle → Low Power Idle
FR = 85h : Disable APM (Set Mode-0)
Active Idle:
The head is in a position of extreme inner in disk
medium. (VCM Lock)
C141-E249
1-13
Device Overview
Low Power Idle:
Standby:
The head is unloaded from disk.
The spindle motor rotates.
The spindle motor stops.
In APM Mode-1, which is the APM default mode, the operation status shifts till it
finally reaches "Low Power Idle."
Table 1.7 Advanced Power Management
Active Idle
(VCM Lock)
Low Power Idle
(Unload)
Standby
(Spin Off)
APM Mode
Mode-0
Mode-1
Mode-2
3-4 sec
3-4 sec
3-4 sec
15 min.
10-40 sec
10-40 sec
N/A
N/A
N/A
When the maximum time that the HDD is waiting for commands has been
exceeded:
Mode-0: Mode shifts from Active condition to Active Idle in 3-4 seconds, and to
Low Power Idle in 15 minutes.
Mode-1: Mode shifts from Active condition to Active Idle in 3-4 seconds and to
Low Power Idle in 10-40 seconds.
Mode-2: Mode shifts from Active condition to Active Idle in 3-4 seconds and to
Low Power Idle in 10-40 seconds.
Remark:
The default values of these settings are reflected in the WORD 91 values of the
IDENTIFY DEVICE command. Also, the APM mode is initialized to Mode-1
(default value) at power-off.
The above mentioned is time until shifting to each power mode based on point that
the drive becomes a command waiting state.
1-14
C141-E249
1.12 Interface Power Management (IPM)
1.12 Interface Power Management (IPM)
1.12.1 Host-initiated interface power management (HIPM)
When the disk drive is waiting for commands, it can enter one of three IPM modes
as requested by the host. The three IPM modes are:
1) Partial mode: PMREQ_P is sent when the host requests the Partial mode.
2) Slumber mode: PMREQ_S is sent when the host requests the Slumber mode.
3) Active mode: When the serial ATA interface is in active state.
There are three interface (I/F) power states: Active, Partial, and Slumber. As
requested by the host, the disk drive switches its I/F power state from the Active
state to the Partial state, or from the Active state to the Slumber state.
1.12.2 Device-initiated interface power management (DIPM)
If this function is enabled by Set Features command, the disk drive shifts to two
kinds of IPM modes automatically under the Idle condition.
1) Partial mode: PMREQ_P is sent when the disk drive requests the Partial
mode.
2) Slumber mode: PMREQ_S is sent when the disk drive requests the Slumber
mode.
I/F power states
1) Active state
The SATA interface is active, and data can be sent and received.
2) Partial state
The SATA interface is in the Power Down state. In this state, the interface is
switched to the Partial state when a PMREQ_P signal is received from or sent
to host. Because the return time to the Active state from the Partial state is
specified as within 10 µs, the degree of the I/F Power Save mode is shallow
so that this recovery time is satisfied.
3) Slumber state
The SATA interface is in the Power Down state. In this state, the interface is
switched to the Slumber state when a PMREQ_S signal is received from or
sent to host. Because the return time to the Active state from the Slumber
state is specified as within 10 ms, the degree of the I/F Power Save mode is
deep so that this recovery time is satisfied.
C141-E249
1-15
Device Overview
Table 1.8 Interface power management
IPM Mode
I/F power state
Active State
Partial State
Return time to active
−
I/F condition
Active
Active
Partial
Power Down
Power Down
5 to 10 µs maximum
5 to 10 ms maximum
Slumber
Slumber State
1-16
C141-E249
CHAPTER 2 Device Configuration
2.1
2.2
Device Configuration
System Configuration
This chapter describes the internal configurations of the hard disk drives and the
configuration of the systems in which they operate.
C141-E249
2-1
Device Configuration
2.1 Device Configuration
Figure 2.1 shows the disk drive. The disk drive consists of a disk enclosure (DE),
read/write preamplifier, and controller PCA. The disk enclosure contains the disk
media, heads, spindle motor, actuator, and a circulating air filter.
Figure 2.1 Disk drive outerview
(1) Disk
The outer diameter of the disk is 65 mm. The inner diameter is 20 mm.
(2) Head
The heads are of the load/unload (L/UL) type. The head unloads the disk out of
while the disk is not rotating and loads on the disk when the disk starts.
(3) Spindle motor
The disks are rotated by a direct drive Sensor-less DC motor.
(4) Actuator
The actuator uses a revolving voice coil motor (VCM) structure which consumes
low power and generates very little heat. The head assembly at the edge of the
actuator arm is controlled and positioned by feedback of the servo information
read by the read/write head. If the power is not on or if the spindle motor is
stopped, the head assembly stays on the ramp out of the disk and is fixed by a
mechanical lock.
(5) Air circulation system
The disk enclosure (DE) is sealed to prevent dust and dirt from entering. The
disk enclosure features a closed loop air circulation system that relies on the
blower effect of the rotating disk. This system continuously circulates the air
through the circulation filter to maintain the cleanliness of the air within the disk
enclosure.
2-2
C141-E249
2.2 System Configuration
(6) Read/write circuit
The read/write circuit uses a LSI chip for the read/write preamplifier. It improves
data reliability by preventing errors caused by external noise.
(7) Controller circuit
The controller circuit supports Serial-ATA interface, and it realized a high
performance by integration into LSI.
2.2 System Configuration
2.2.1 SATA interface
Figure 2.2 shows the SATA interface system configuration. The disk drive
complies with ATA/ATAPI-8, SATA I High Speed Serialized AT Attachment
1.0a, SATA II Extensions to Serial ATA 1.0a and SATA II Electrical Spec 1.0.
2.2.2 Drive connection
Operating System
Serial
ATA
Adapter
Application 1
Disk Drive
Disk Drive
Driver
Application 2
Application 3
Figure 2.2 Drive system configuration
C141-E249
2-3
This page is intentionally left blank.
CHAPTER 3 Installation Conditions
3.1
3.2
3.3
Dimensions
Mounting
Connections with Host System
This chapter gives the external dimensions, installation conditions, surface
temperature conditions, cable connections, and switch settings of the hard disk
drives.
C141-E249
3-1
Installation Conditions
3.1 Dimensions
Figure 3.1 illustrates the dimensions of the disk drive. All dimensions are in mm.
*1
*2
*3
*4
The PCA and connectors are not included in these dimensions.
Dimension from the center of the user tap to the base of the connector pins
Length of the connector pins
Dimension from the outer edge of the user tap to the center of the connector
pins
*5
Dimension from the outer edge of the user tap to the innermost edge of the
connector pins
Figure 3.1 Dimensions
3-2
C141-E249
3.2 Mounting
3.2 Mounting
For information on mounting, see the "FUJITSU 2.5-INCH HDD INTEGRATION
GUIDANCE (C141-E144)."
(1) Orientation
(2) Frame
The disk drives can be mounted in any direction.
The MR head bias of the HDD disk enclosure (DE) is zero. The mounting frame
is connected to Signal Ground (SG).
IMPORTANT
Use M3 screw for the mounting screw and the screw length should
satisfy the specification in Figure 3.2.
The tightening torque must be 0.49N•m (5kgf•cm).
When attaching the HDD to the system frame, do not allow the
system frame to touch parts (cover and base) other than parts to
which the HDD is attached.
C141-E249
3-3
Installation Conditions
(3) Limitation of mounting
Note) These dimensions are recommended values; if it is not possible to satisfy
them, contact us.
Side surface
mounting
2.5
2.5
Bottom surface mounting
DE
2.5
2.5
2
B
PCA
A
Frame of system
cabinet
Frame of system
cabinet
3.0 or less
Details of A
Screw
Screw
3.0 or less
Figure 3.2 Mounting frame structure
3-4
C141-E249
3.2 Mounting
IMPORTANT
Because of breather hole mounted to the HDD, do not allow this to
close during mounting.
Locating of breather hole is shown as Figure 3.3.
For breather hole of Figure 3.3, at least, do not allow its around φ 3
to block.
Figure 3.3 Location of breather
C141-E249
3-5
Installation Conditions
(4) Ambient temperature
The temperature conditions for a disk drive mounted in a cabinet refer to the
ambient temperature at a point 3 cm from the disk drive. The ambient
temperature must satisfy the temperature conditions described in Section 1.4, and
the airflow must be considered to prevent the DE surface cover temperature from
exceeding 60 °C.
Provide air circulation in the cabinet such that the PCA side, in particular,
receives sufficient cooling. To check the cooling efficiency, measure the surface
cover temperatures of the DE. Regardless of the ambient temperature, this
surface cover temperature must meet the standards listed in Table 3.1. Figure 3.4
shows the temperature measurement point.
1
Figure 3.4 Surface cover temperature measurement points
Table 3.1 Surface temperature measurement points and standard values
No.
1
Measurement point
DE cover
Temperature
60°C max
IMPORTANT
For details of the reliability for each temperature range, refer to the
Section 1.7, "Reliability."
3-6
C141-E249
3.2 Mounting
(5) Service area
Figure 3.5 shows how the drive must be accessed (service areas) during and after
installation.
Mounting screw hole
Cable connection
Mounting screw hole
Figure 3.5 Service area
Data corruption: Avoid mounting the disk drive near strong
magnetic sources such as loud speakers. Ensure that the disk drive
is not affected by external magnetic fields.
Damage: Do not press the cover of the disk drive. Pressing it too
hard, the cover and the spindle motor contact, which may cause
damage to the disk drive.
Static: When handling the device, disconnect the body ground
(500 kΩ or greater). Do not touch the printed circuit board, but hold
it by the edges.
(6) Handling cautions
Please keep the following cautions, and handle the HDD under the safety
environment.
C141-E249
3-7
Installation Conditions
-
General notes
ESD mat
Shock absorbing mat
Wrist strap
Use the Wrist strap.
Place the shock absorbing mat on the
operation table, and place ESD mat on it.
Do not hit HDD each other.
Do not stack when carrying.
Do not place HDD vertically
to avoid falling down.
Do not drop.
Figure 3.6 Handling cautions
-
-
Installation
(1) Please use the driver of a low impact when you use an electric driver.
HDD is occasionally damaged by the impact of the driver.
(2) Please observe the tightening torque of the screw strictly.
M3 ······· 0.49N · m (5 kgf · cm).
Recommended equipments
Contents
Wrist strap
Model
JX-1200-3056-8
SKY-8A (Color Seiden Mat)
SS-6500
Maker
SUMITOMO 3M
Achilles
ESD
ESD mat
Shock
Low shock driver
HIOS
3-8
C141-E249
3.3 Connections with Host System
3.3 Connections with Host System
3.3.1 Device connector
The disk drive has the SATA interface connectors listed below for connecting
external devices. Figure 3.7 shows the locations of these connectors and
terminals.
SATA interface
PCA
and power
connectors
Figure 3.7 Connector locations
C141-E249
3-9
Installation Conditions
3.3.2 Signal segment and power supply segment
Figure 3.8 shows each segment of the SATA interface connector and pin numbers.
View from the
connector side
Power supply
segment
Signal segment
View from the
PCA side
S1 pins in the signal
segment
P1 pins in the power
supply segment
Figure 3.8 Power supply pins (CN1)
3.3.3 Connector specifications for host system
Table 3.2 lists the recommended specifications for the host interface connectors.
Table 3.2 The recommended connector specifications for the host system
Segment
Name
Model (Manufacturer)
SATA interface and
power supply
Host receptacle
67492-0220 (Molex) or compatibles
IMPORTANT
The above connector specifications for the host system indicate only
that its mating with the SATA interface connecter is confirmed.
Accordingly, the number connecter insertion/extractions including
hot plugging is not guaranteed.
The connection reliability per number of insertion/extractions varies
with the condition of the connection with the host system.
Therefore, we recommend that the customer evaluate the connecter
on the customer's system and select it from the several choices
including its equivalents (compatibles).
3-10
C141-E249
3.3 Connections with Host System
3.3.4 SATA interface cable connection
The cable that connects the disk drive to the host system must be compliant with
the Serial ATA 1.0a specification.
3.3.5 Note about SATA interface cable connection
Take note of the following precaution about plugging a SATA interface cable into
the SATA interface connector of the disk drive and plugging the connector into a
host receptacle:
When plugging together the disk drive SATA interface connector
and the host receptacle or SATA interface cable connector, do not
apply more than 10 kgf of force in the connection direction once
they are snugly and securely in position.
C141-E249
3-11
This page is intentionally left blank.
CHAPTER 4 Theory of Device Operation
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
Outline
Subassemblies
Circuit Configuration
Power-on Sequence
Self-calibration
Read/write Circuit
Servo Control
This chapter explains basic design concepts of the disk drive. Also, this chapter
explains subassemblies of the disk drive, each sequence, servo control, and
electrical circuit blocks.
C141-E249
4-1
Theory of Device Operation
4.1 Outline
This chapter consists of two parts. First part (Section 4.2) explains mechanical
assemblies of the disk drive. Second part (Sections 4.3 through 4.7) explains a
servo information recorded in the disk drive and drive control method.
4.2 Subassemblies
The disk drive consists of a disk enclosure (DE) and printed circuit assembly
(PCA).
The DE contains all movable parts in the disk drive, including the disk, spindle,
actuator, read/write head, and air filter. For details, see Subsections 4.2.1 to 4.2.4.
The PCA contains the control circuits for the disk drive. The disk drive has one
PCA. For details, see Sections 4.3.
4.2.1 Disk
The DE contains disks with an outer diameter of 65 mm and an inner diameter of
20 mm.
Servo data is recorded on each cylinder (total 134). Servo data written at factory
is read out by the read head. For servo data, see Section 4.7.
4.2.2 Spindle
The spindle consists of a disk stack assembly and spindle motor. The disk stack
assembly is activated by the direct drive sensor-less DC spindle motor, which has
a speed of 5,400 rpm ±1%. The spindle is controlled with detecting a PHASE
signal generated by counter electromotive voltage of the spindle motor at starting.
4.2.3 Actuator
The actuator consists of a voice coil motor (VCM) and a head carriage. The VCM
moves the head carriage along the inner or outer edge of the disk. The head
carriage position is controlled by feeding back the difference of the target position
that is detected and reproduced from the servo information read by the read/write
head.
4-2
C141-E249
4.3 Circuit Configuration
4.2.4 Air filter
There are two types of air filters: a breather filter and a circulation filter.
The breather filter makes an air in and out of the DE to prevent unnecessary
pressure around the spindle when the disk starts or stops rotating. When disk
drives are transported under conditions where the air pressure changes a lot,
filtered air is circulated in the DE.
The circulation filter cleans out dust and dirt from inside the DE. The disk drive
cycles air continuously through the circulation filter through an enclosed loop air
cycle system operated by a blower on the rotating disk.
4.3 Circuit Configuration
Figure 4.1 shows the power supply configuration of the disk drive, and Figure 4.2
shows the disk drive circuit configuration.
(1) Read/write circuit
The read/write circuit consists of two circuits; read/write preamplifier (PreAMP)
and read channel (RDC) which is integrated into LSI with MCU and HDC.
The PreAMP consists of the write current switch circuit, that flows the write
current to the head coil, and the voltage amplifier circuit, that amplitudes the read
output from the head.
The RDC is the read demodulation circuit using the Modified Extended Partial
Response (MEEPR), and contains the Viterbi detector, programmable filter,
adaptable transversal filter, times base generator, data separator circuits, RLL (Run
Length Limited) encoder and servo demodulation circuit.
(2) Servo circuit
The position and speed of the voice coil motor are controlled by closed-loop servo
using the servo information recorded on the data surface. The servo information is
an analog signal converted to digital for processing by a MPU and then
reconverted to an analog signal for control of the voice coil motor.
The MPU precisely sets each head on the track according on the servo information
on the media surface.
(3) Spindle motor driver circuit
The circuit measures the interval of a PHASE signal generated by counter-
electromotive voltage of a motor and controls the motor speed comparing target
speed.
C141-E249
4-3
Theory of Device Operation
(4) Controller circuit
Major functions are listed below.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Serial-ATA interface control and data transfer control
Data buffer management
Sector format control
Defect management
ECC control
Error recovery and self-diagnosis
5.0V
S-DRAM
3.3V
Generator
Circuit
SVC
-3V
1.2V
Generator
Circuit
PreAMP
Generator
Circuit
-3.0V
3.3V
MCU & HDC & RDC
Integration
1.2V
Figure 4.1 Power supply configuration
4-4
C141-E249
4.3 Circuit Configuration
Serial ATA I/F
PCA
MCU & HDC & RDC
Data Buffer
SDRAM
MCU
HDC
RDC
Shock
Sensor
SVC
Crystal
DE
Thermistor
SP Motor
Media
VCM
R/W Pre-Amp
HEAD
Figure 4.2 Circuit configuration
C141-E249
4-5
Theory of Device Operation
4.4 Power-on Sequence
Figure 4.3 describes the operation sequence of the disk drive at power-on. The
outline is described below.
a) After the power is turned on, the disk drive initializes its SATA interface
block.
b) The disk drive executes the MPU bus test, internal register read/write test,
and work RAM read/write test. When the self-diagnosis terminates
successfully, the disk drive starts the spindle motor.
c) The disk drive executes self-diagnosis (data buffer read/write test).
d) After confirming that the spindle motor has reached rated speed, the head
assembly is loaded on the disk.
e) The disk drive positions the heads onto the SA area and reads out the system
information.
f) The drive becomes ready. The host can issue commands.
g) The disk drive executes self -calibration. This collects data for VCM torque
and mechanical external forces applied to the actuator, and updates the
calibrating value.
4-6
C141-E249
4.4 Power-on Sequence
Power-on
Start
a)
SATA I/F Initialization
b)
Self-diagnosis 1
- MPU bus test
- Internal register
write/read test
- Work RAM write/read
test
The spindle motor starts.
Self-diagnosis 2
- Data buffer write/read
test
c)
e)
f)
Initial on-track and read
out of system information
Confirming spindle motor
speed
d)
Drive ready state
(command waiting state)
Load the head assembly
g)
Execute self-calibration
End
Figure 4.3 Power-on operation sequence
C141-E249
4-7
Theory of Device Operation
4.5 Self-calibration
The disk drive occasionally performs self-calibration in order to sense and
calibrate mechanical external forces on the actuator, and VCM torque. This
enables precise seek and read/write operations.
4.5.1 Self-calibration contents
(1) Sensing and compensating for external forces
The actuator suffers from torque due to the FPC forces and winds accompanying
disk revolution. The torque varies with the disk drive and the cylinder where the
head is positioned. To execute stable fast seek operations, external forces are
occasionally sensed.
The firmware of the drive measures and stores the force (value of the actuator
motor drive current) that balances the torque for stopping head stably. This
includes the current offset in the power amplifier circuit and DAC system.
The forces are compensated by adding the measured value to the specified current
value to the power amplifier. This makes the stable servo control.
To compensate torque varying by the cylinder, the disk is divided into 13 areas
from the innermost to the outermost circumference and the compensating value is
measured at the measuring cylinder on each area at factory calibration. The
measured values are stored in the SA cylinder. In the self-calibration, the
compensating value is updated using the value in the SA cylinder.
(2) Compensating open loop gain
Torque constant value of the VCM has dispersion for each drive, and varies
depending on the cylinder that the head is positioned. To realize the high speed
seek operation, the value that compensates torque constant value change and loop
gain change of the whole servo system due to temperature change is measured and
stored.
For sensing, the firmware mixes the disturbance signal to the position signal at the
state that the head is positioned to any cylinder. The firmware calculates the loop
gain from the position signal and stores the compensation value against to the
target gain as ratio.
For compensating, the direction current value to the power amplifier is multiplied
by the compensation value. By this compensation, loop gain becomes constant
value and the stable servo control is realized.
4-8
C141-E249
4.5 Self-calibration
To compensate torque constant value change depending on cylinder, whole
cylinders from most inner to most outer cylinder are divided into 13 partitions at
calibration in the factory, and the compensation data is measured for
representative cylinder of each partition. This measured value is stored in the SA
area. The compensation value at self-calibration is calculated using the value in
the SA area.
4.5.2 Execution timing of self-calibration
Self-calibration is performed once when power is turned on. After that, the disk
drive does not perform self-calibration until it detects an error.
That is, self-calibration is performed each time one of the following events occur:
•
When it passes from the power on for about 10 seconds except that the disk
drive shifts to Idle mode, Standby mode, and Sleep mode by execution of any
commands.
•
•
The number of retries to write or seek data reaches the specified value.
The error rate of data reading, writing, or seeking becomes lower than the
specified value.
4.5.3 Command processing during self-calibration
This enables the host to execute the command without waiting for a long time,
even when the disk drive is performing self-calibration. The command execution
wait time is about maximum 72 ms.
When the error rate of data reading, writing, or seeking becomes lower than the
specified value, self-calibration is performed to maintain disk drive stability.
If the disk drive receives a command execution request from the host while
performing self-calibration, it stops the self-calibration and starts to execute the
command. In other words, if a disk read or write service is necessary, the disk
drive positions the head to the track requested by the host, reads or writes data,
and then restarts calibration after about 3 seconds.
If the error rate recovers to a value exceeding the specified value, self-calibration
is not performed.
C141-E249
4-9
Theory of Device Operation
4.6 Read/write Circuit
The read/write circuit consists of the read/write preamplifier (PreAMP), the write
circuit, the read circuit, and the time base generator in the read channel (RDC)
block which is integrated into LSI. Figure 4.4 is a block diagram of the read/write
circuit.
4.6.1 Read/write preamplifier (PreAMP)
PreAMP equips a read preamplifier and a write current switch, that sets the bias
current to the MR device and the current in writing. Each channel is connected to
each data head, and PreAMP switches channel by serial I/O. In the event of any
abnormalities, including a head short-circuit or head open circuit, the write unsafe
signal is generated so that abnormal write does not occur.
4.6.2 Write circuit
The write data is transferred from the hard disk controller (HDC) to the RDC in
LSI. The write data is sent to the PreAMP as differential signal from LSI, and the
data is written onto the media.
(1) Write precompensation
Write precompensation compensates, during a write process, for write non-
linearity generated at reading.
Figure 4.4 Read/write circuit block diagram
4-10
C141-E249
4.6 Read/write Circuit
4.6.3 Read circuit
The head read signal from the PreAMP is regulated by the automatic gain control
(AGC) circuit. Then the output is converted into the sampled read data pulse by
the programmable filter circuit and the flash digitizer circuit. This signal is
converted into the read data by the decorder circuit based on the read data
maximum-likelihood-detected by the Viterbi detection circuit.
(1) AGC circuit
The AGC circuit automatically regulates the output amplitude to a constant value
even when the input amplitude level fluctuates. The AGC amplifier output is
maintained at a constant level even when the head output fluctuates due to the
head characteristics or outer/inner head positions.
(2) Programmable filter circuit
The programmable filter circuit has a low-pass filter function that eliminates
unnecessary high frequency noise component and a high frequency boost-up
function that equalizes the waveform of the read signal.
Cut-off frequency of the low-pass filter and boost-up gain are controlled from the
register in read channel block. The MPU optimizes the cut-off frequency and
boost-up gain according to the transfer frequency of each zone.
Figure 4.5 shows the frequency characteristic sample of the programmable filter.
-3 dB
Figure 4.5 Frequency characteristic of programmable filter
C141-E249
4-11
Theory of Device Operation
(3) FIR circuit
This circuit is 10-tap sampled analog transversal filter circuit that equalizes the
head read signal to the Modified Extended Partial Response (MEEPR) waveform.
(4) A/D converter circuit
This circuit changes Sampled Read Data Pulse from the FIR circuit into Digital
Read Data.
(5) Viterbi detection circuit
The sample hold waveform output from the flash digitizer circuit is sent to the
Viterbi detection circuit. The Viterbi detection circuit demodulates data according
to the survivor path sequence.
4.6.4 Digital PLL circuit
The drive uses constant density recording to increase total capacity. This is
different from the conventional method of recording data with a fixed data transfer
rate at all data area. In the constant density recording method, data area is divided
into zones by radius and the data transfer rate is set so that the recording density of
the inner cylinder of each zone is nearly constant. The drive divides data area into
30 zones to set the data transfer rate.
The MPU set the data transfer rate setup data (SD/SC) to the RDC block that
includes the Digital PLL circuit to change the data transfer rate.
4-12
C141-E249
4.7 Servo Control
4.7 Servo Control
The actuator motor and the spindle motor are submitted to servo control. The
actuator motor is controlled for moving and positioning the head to the track
containing the desired data. To turn the disk at a constant velocity, the actuator
motor is controlled according to the servo data that is written on the data side
beforehand.
4.7.1 Servo control circuit
Figure 4.6 is the block diagram of the servo control circuit. The following
describes the functions of the blocks:
(1)
MPU/HDC/RDC
SVC
(3)
(4)
Power
(2)
Servo
burst
capture
MPU
core
DAC
Head
VCM current
Amp
CSR
(7)
Position Sense
VCM
(5)
(6)
Driver
Spindle
motor
control
Spindle
motor
CSR: Current Sense Resister
VCM: Voice Coil Motor
Figure 4.6 Block diagram of servo control circuit
C141-E249
4-13
Theory of Device Operation
(1) Microprocessor unit (MPU)
The MPU executes startup of the spindle motor, movement to the reference
cylinder, seek to the specified cylinder, and calibration operations.
The main internal operations of the MPU are shown below.
a. Spindle motor start
Starts the spindle motor and accelerates it to normal speed when power is
applied.
b. Move head to reference cylinder
Drives the VCM to position the head at the any cylinder in the data area. The
logical initial cylinder is at the outermost circumference (cylinder 0).
c. Seek to specified cylinder
Drives the VCM to position the head to the specified cylinder.
d. Calibration
Senses and stores the thermal offset between heads and the mechanical forces
on the actuator, and stores the calibration value.
(2) Servo burst capture circuit
The servo burst capture circuit reproduces signals (position signals) that indicate
the head position from the servo data on the data surface. From the servo area on
the data area surface, via the data head, the burst signals of EVEN1, ODD,
EVEN2 are output as shown in Figure 4.8 in subsequent to the servo mark, gray
code that indicates the cylinder position, and index information. The servo signals
do A/D-convert by Fourier-demodulator in the servo burst capture circuit. At that
time the AGC circuit is in hold mode. The A/D converted data is recognized by
the MPU as position information.
(3) D/A converter (DAC)
The control program calculates the specified data value (digital value) of the VCM
drive current, and the value is converted from digital-to-analog so that an analog
output voltage is sent to the power amplifier.
(4) Power amplifier
The power amplifier feeds currents, corresponding to the DAC output signal
voltage to the VCM.
(5) Spindle motor control circuit
The spindle motor control circuit controls the sensor-less spindle motor. A spindle
driver IC with a built-in PLL circuit that is on a hardware unit controls the sensor-
less spindle motor.
4-14
C141-E249
4.7 Servo Control
(6) Driver circuit
The driver circuit is a power amplitude circuit that receives signals from the
spindle motor control circuit and feeds currents to the spindle motor.
(7) VCM current sense resistor (CSR)
This resistor controls current at the power amplifier by converting the VCM
current into voltage and feeding back.
4.7.2 Data-surface servo format
Figure 4.7 describes the physical layout of the servo frame. The three areas
indicated by (1) to (3) in Figure 4.7 are described below.
(1) Inner guard band
This area is located inside the user area, and the rotational speed of the VCM can
be controlled on this cylinder area for head moving.
(2) Data area
This area is used as the user data area and SA area.
(3) Outer guard band
This area is located at outer position of the user data area, and the rotational speed
of the spindle can be controlled on this cylinder area for head moving.
C141-E249
4-15
Theory of Device Operation
CYLn
CYLn – 1 (n: even number)
Diameter
direction
CYLn + 1
W/R Recovery
Servo Mark
Gray Code
W/R Recovery
Servo Mark
Gray Code
W/R Recovery
Servo Mark
Gray Code
EVEN1
ODD
Circumference
Direction
EVEN2
Post code (MHW2120BS only)
PAD
Erase:DC erase
area
Figure 4.7 Physical sector servo configuration on disk surface
4-16
C141-E249
4.7 Servo Control
4.7.3 Servo frame format
As the servo information, the IDD uses the phase signal servo generated from the
gray code and servo EVEN and ODD. This servo information is used for
positioning operation of radius direction and position detection of circumstance
direction.
The servo frame consists of 5 blocks; write/read recovery, servo mark, gray code,
Burst EVEN1, Burst ODD, Burst EVEN2, and PAD. Figure 4.8 shows the servo
frame format.
Write/read
recovery
Servo Gray code
mark
Burst
EVEN1
Burst
ODD
Burst
EVEN2
Post
code
PAD
(MHW
2120BS
only)
Figure 4.8 Servo frame format
(1) Write/read recovery
This area is used to absorb the write/read transient and to stabilize the AGC.
(2) Servo mark
This area generates a timing for demodulating the gray code and position-
demodulating the burst signal by detecting the servo mark.
(3) Gray code (including sector address bits)
This area is used as cylinder address. The data in this area is converted into the
binary data by the gray code demodulation circuit.
(4) Burst Even1, Burst Odd, Burst Even2
These areas are used as position signals between tracks and the IDD control so that
target phase signal is generated from Burst Even and Burst Odd.
(5) Post code (MHW2120BS only)
This area is used for the precise correction of the servo information which is
recorded on the media.
(6) PAD
This area is used as a gap between servo and data.
C141-E249
4-17
Theory of Device Operation
4.7.4 Actuator motor control
The voice coil motor (VCM) is controlled by feeding back the servo data recorded
on the data surface. The MPU fetches the position sense data on the servo frame
at a constant interval of sampling time, executes calculation, and updates the VCM
drive current.
The servo control of the actuator includes the operation to move the head to the
reference cylinder, the seek operation to move the head to the target cylinder to
read or write data, and the track-following operation to position the head onto the
target track.
(1) Operation to move the head to the reference cylinder
The MPU moves the head to the reference cylinder when the power is turned. The
reference cylinder is in the data area.
When power is applied the heads are moved from the outside of media to the
normal servo data zone in the following sequence:
a) Micro current is fed to the VCM to press the head against the outer direction.
b) The head is loaded on the disk.
c) When the servo mark is detected the head is moved slowly toward the inner
circumference at a constant speed.
d) If the head is stopped at the reference cylinder from there. Track following
control starts.
(2) Seek operation
Upon a data read/write request from the host, the MPU confirms the necessity of
access to the disk. If a read/write instruction is issued, the MPU seeks the desired
track.
The MPU feeds the VCM current via the D/A converter and power amplifier to
move the head. The MPU calculates the difference (speed error) between the
specified target position and the current position for each sampling timing during
head moving. The MPU then feeds the VCM drive current by setting the
calculated result into the D/A converter. The calculation is digitally executed by
the firmware. When the head arrives at the target cylinder, the track is followed.
(3) Track following operation
Except during head movement to the reference cylinder and seek operation under
the spindle rotates in steady speed, the MPU does track following control. To
position the head at the center of a track, the DSP drives the VCM by feeding
micro current. For each sampling time, the VCM drive current is determined by
filtering the position difference between the target position and the position
clarified by the detected position sense data. The filtering includes servo
compensation. These are digitally controlled by the firmware.
4-18
C141-E249
4.7 Servo Control
4.7.5 Spindle motor control
Hall-less three-phase twelve-pole motor is used for the spindle motor, and the
PWM type current control circuit is used as the spindle motor driver (called SVC
hereafter). The firmware operates on the MPU manufactured by Fujitsu. The
spindle motor is controlled by sending several signals including the serial data
from the MPU to the SVC. There are three modes for the spindle control; start
mode, acceleration mode, and stable rotation mode.
(1) Start mode
When power is supplied, the spindle motor is started in the following sequence:
a) After the power is turned on, the MPU sends the serial data to the SVC to
charge the charge pump capacitor of the SVC.
b) When the charge pump capacitor is charged enough, the MPU sets the SVC to
the motor start mode.
It moves to 3) or 5) step depending on the condition of spindle motor. It is
treaded as the stop condition, it moves to the step 3). Whereas, it is treated as
the free-wheeling condition, it moves to the step 5).
c) The phase of the current flowed in the motor is changed in the order of (V-
phase to U-phase), (W-phase to U-phase), (W-phase to V-phase), (U-phase to
V-phase), (U-phase to W-phase), and (V-phase to W-phase) (after that,
repeating this order).
The above operations mean the generation of rotational magnetic field.
d) During phase switching, the spindle motor starts rotating in low speed, and
generates a back electromotive force. The SVC detects this back
electromotive force and reports to the MPU using a PHASE signal for speed
detection.
e) The MPU is waiting for a PHASE signal. When no phase signal is sent for a
specific period, the MPU resets the SVC and starts from the beginning. When
a PHASE signal is sent, the SVC enters the acceleration mode.
(2) Acceleration mode
In this mode, the MPU stops the phase switching to the SVC. The SVC starts a
phase switching by itself based on the back electromotive force. Then, rotation of
the spindle motor accelerates. The MPU calculates a rotational speed of the
spindle motor based on the PHASE signal from the SVC, and waits till the
rotational speed reaches 5,400 rpm. When the rotational speed reaches 5,400 rpm,
the SVC enters the stable rotation mode.
(3) Stable rotation mode
The SVC builds the PLL circuit into, and to become the rotational speed of the
target, controls a stable rotation with hardware.
The firmware calculates time of one rotation from PHASE signal. PHASE signal
is outputted from the SVC. And the firmware observes an abnormal rotation.
C141-E249
4-19
This page is intentionally left blank.
CHAPTER 5 Interface
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
Physical Interface
Logical Interface
Host Commands
Command Protocol
Power-on and COMRESET
This chapter gives details about the interface, and the interface commands and
timings.
C141-E249
5-1
Interface
5.1 Physical Interface
5.1.1 Interface signals
Figure 5.1 shows the interface signals.
TX data
RX data
TX+
TX+
TX data
TX−
TX−
RX+
RX data
RX+
Device
analog
front
Host
analog
front
end
RX−
RX−
end
ComWake
ComWake
ComInit
ComReset
+5VDC
GND
Figure 5.1 Interface signals
An explanation of each signal is provided below.
TX + / TX -
These signals are the outbound high speed differential signals that are
connected to the serial ATA cable.
RX + / RX -
These signals are the inbound high speed differential signals that are connected
to the serial ATA cable.
TxData
Serially encoded 10b data attached to the high speed serial differential line
driver
5-2
C141-E249
5.1 Physical Interface
RxData
Serially encoded 10b data attached to the high speed serial differential line
receiver
COMWAKE
Signal from the out of band detector that indicates the COMWAKE out of
band signal is being detected.
COMRESET / COMINIT
Host:
Signal from the out of band detector that indicates the COMINIT out
of band signal is being detected.
Device: Signal from the out of band detector that indicates the COMRESET
out of band signal is being detected.
5VDC/GND
5VDC: +5 V power supply to the disk drive
GND: Ground for each signal and +5 V power supply
C141-E249
5-3
Interface
5.1.2 Signal interface regulation
5.1.2.1 Out of band signaling
During OOB signaling transmissions, the differential and common mode levels of
the signal lines shall comply with the same electrical specifications as for in-band
data transmission, specified as follows.
COMRESET/COMINIT
106.7 ns
320 ns
COMWAKE
106.7 ns
106.7 ns
5-4
C141-E249
5.1 Physical Interface
5.1.2.2 Primitives descriptions
The following table contains the primitive mnemonics and a brief description of
each.
Primitive
ALIGN
Name
Description
Physical layer control
Upon receipt of an ALIGN, the physical layer
readjusts internal operations as necessary to
perform its functions correctly.
CONT
Continue repeating
previous primitive
The CONT primitive allows long strings of
repeated primitives to be eliminated. The
CONT primitive implies that the previously
received primitive be repeated as long as
another primitive is not received.
EOF
End of frame
EOF marks the end of a frame.
PMACK
Power management
acknowledge
Sent in response to a PMREQ_S or
PMREQ_P when a receiving node is prepared
to enter a power mode state.
HOLD
Hold data transmission
HOLD is transmitted in place of payload data
within a frame when the transmitter does not
have the next payload data ready for
transmission. HOLD is also transmitted on the
backchannel when a receiver is not ready to
receive additional payload data.
HOLDA
PMNAK
Hold acknowledge
This primitive is sent by a transmitter as long
the HOLD primitive is received by its
companion receiver.
Power management
denial
Sent in response to a PMREQ_S or
PMREQ_P when a receiving node is not
prepared to enter a power mode state or when
power management is not supported.
PMREQ_P
Power management
request to partial
This primitive is sent continuously until
PMACK or PMNAK is received. When
PMACK is received, current node (host or
device) will stop PMREQ_P and enters the
Partial power management state.
PMREQ_S
R_ERR
Power management
request to slumber
This primitive is sent continuously until
PMACK or PMNAK is received. When
PMACK is received, current node (host or
device) will stop PMREQ_S and enters the
Slumber power management state.
Reception error
Current node (host or device) detected error in
received payload.
C141-E249
5-5
Interface
Primitive
Name
Description
R_IP
Reception in progress
Current node (host or device) is receiving
payload.
R_OK
R_RDY
SOF
Reception with no error
Receiver ready
Current node (host or device) detected no
error in received payload.
Current node (host or device) is ready to
receive payload.
Start of frame
Start of a frame. Payload and CRC follow to
EOF.
SYNC
Synchronization
Synchronizing primitive - always idle.
WTRM
Wait for frame
termination
After transmission of any of the EOF, the
transmitter will transmit WTRM while waiting
for reception status from receiver.
X_RDY
Transmission data ready
Current node (host or device) has payload
ready for transmission.
5-6
C141-E249
5.1 Physical Interface
5.1.3 Electrical specifications
Table 5.1 Physical Layer Electrical Requirements (1/3)
a) General Specifications
Units
Nom
Min
Max
Comments
Channel Speed
Fbaud
Gbs
1.5
1.5
Reference Value
GHz
FER,
8.2e-8 at 95%
Frame Error Rate
confidence level
TUI
,
ps
666.6667 666.4333
-350
670.2333
Unit Interval
f
tol,
ppm
350
33
TX Frequency
Long Term Stability
f
SSC,
kHz
ppm
mV
mV
30
Spread-Spectrum
Modulation Frequency
SSC
Spread-Spectrum
Modulation Deviation
tol,
-5000
0
V
cm,dc,
250
100
200
0
450
2000
DC Coupled
Common Mode Voltage
V
cm,ac coupled,
AC Coupled
Common Mode Voltage
Z
diff,
ohm
nF
Nominal
Differential Impedance
C
ac coupling
12
10
AC Coupling Capacitance
t
settle,cm,
ns
Common Mode
Transient Settle Time
V
trans,
V
-2.0
2.0
Sequencing
Transient Voltage
C141-E249
5-7
Interface
Table 5.1 Physical Layer Electrical Requirements (2/3)
b) Transmitter Specifications
Units
Ohm
Nom
Min
85
Max
115
Comments
Z
diffTX,
TX Pair Differential
Impedance
Z
s-eTX,
Ohm
40
TX Single-Ended
Impedance
c) Transmitted Signal Requirements
Units
Nom
500
Min
400
Max
600
Comments
Differential
nominal measured
at Serial ATA
connector on
V
diffTX,
mVppd
TX Differential
Output Voltage
transmit side
(+/-250mV
differential@seria
l ATA connector)
Rise:20%-80% at
transmitter
ps
0.15
0.41
t
20-80TX,
(UI)
(20-80%)
(20-80%)
TX Rise/Fall Time
Fall: 80%-20% at
transmitter
t
skewTX,
ps
20
TX Differential Skew
TJ at Connector,
Data-Data, 5UI
UI
UI
UI
UI
0.355
0.175
0.47
DJ at Connector,
Data-Data, 5UI
TJ at Connector,
Data-Data, 250UI
DJ at Connector,
Data-Data, 250UI
0.22
5-8
C141-E249
5.1 Physical Interface
Table 5.1 Physical Layer Electrical Requirements (3/3)
d) Receiver Specifications
Units
Ohm
Nom
Min
85
Max
115
Comments
ZdiffRX,
RX Pair Differential
Impedance
Z
s-eRX,
Ohm
40
RX Single-Ended
Impedance
e) OOB Specifications
Units
Nom
100
Min
50
Max
200
Comments
V
thresh,
mVppd
OOB Signal Detection
Threshold
UI
OOB,
ps
666.67
160
646.67
686.67
UI During OOB Signaling
COMINIT/COMRESET
and
COMWAKE
UI
OOB
Transmit Burst Length
COMINIT/COMRESET
Transmit Gap Length
480
160
UI
UI
OOB
OOB
COMWAKE
Transmit Gap Length
May
detect
Shall
detect
Shall not
detect
Units
Comments
COMWAKE
Gap Detection Windows
55 ≤ T
101.3 ≤ T
ns
ns
T < 55 or ≥175
< 175
< 112
COMINIT/COMRESET
Gap Detection Windows
175 ≤ T
< 525
304 ≤ T
< 336
T < 175 or ≥ 525
C141-E249
5-9
Interface
5.1.4 Connector pinouts
The pin definitions are shown in Table 5.2.
Table 5.2 Connector pinouts
Signal segment key
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
Gnd
A+
A-
2nd mate
Differential signal pair A from Phy
2nd mate
Gnd
B-
Differential signal pair B from Phy
B+
Gnd
2nd mate
“Key and spacing separate signal and power segments”
N.C.(Open)
P1
P2
V33
V33
V33
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
V5
N.C.(Open)
N.C.(Open)
P3
P4
1st mate
P5
2nd mate
P6
2nd mate
P7
5 V power, pre-charge, 2nd mate
5 V power
P8
V5
P9
V5
5 V power
P10
P11
Gnd
2nd mate
Staggered
Spin-up Mode/
Ready LED
• Staggered Spin-up mode detect for input
• Ready LED drive for output
For the specification of P11, see Section
5.1.5. (in next page)
When the host system does not use these
function, the corresponding pin to be mated
with P11 in the power cable receptacle
connector shall be grounded.
P12
Gnd
V12
V12
V12
1st mate
N.C.(Open)
N.C.(Open)
N.C.(Open)
P13
P14
P15
Power segment key
Notes:
Note) Since applying a single external supply voltage of 5 V enables this
drive to operate it is unnecessary to supply +3.3 V and +12 V
power supplies.
5-10
C141-E249
5.1 Physical Interface
5.1.5 P11 function
The disk drive supports the following functions when P11 pin in the power supply
segment of interface connector is used as an input or output pin.
P11 pin supports the functions as follows:
•
•
Staggered Spin-up:
Driving Ready LED:
Use P11 as an input pin
Use P11 as an output pin
The following is P11 setting and hardware requirement for these functions.
5.1.5.1 Staggered Spin-up
It is able to set whether the disk drive spins up at power on or not, by input voltage
level of 11th pin at the power supply segment on the interface connector.
a) P11 → Open (no connection):
Staggered Mode Enable.
The disk drive does not spin up until after
successful Phy initialization at power on.
(Default setting)
b) P11 → Grounded (0.8 V or less): Staggered Mode Disable.
The disk drive spins up at power on.
c) P11 → “High” level (The P11 line in the host system is pulled up by
resistor [recommended value: 1 to 5.1 kΩ] to power supply in the
host system [Recommended voltage: 2V (3.3V or less)]:
Staggered Mode Enable
The drive does not spin up until after
successful Phy initialization at power on.
5.1.5.2 Driving Ready LED
It is possible that the disk drive is able to drive P11 pin as output for indication of
Ready LED.
a) P11 output level → “Low”: Ready indication (LED is on)
b) P11 output level → “High”: Not Ready indication (LED is off)
It is necessary to meet the requirements for P11 as output pin in case of driving
Ready LED.
Table 5.3 Requirements for P11 as an output pin.
Asserted
Deasserted
≤ 0.7V
≥ 0.7V
V
ACT
-
+50uA
I
ACT
C141-E249
5-11
Interface
Figure 5.2 Example of the circuit for driving Ready LED
5-12
C141-E249
5.1 Physical Interface
5.1.6 Hot Plug
The disk drive is “Hot Plug Capable” which is based on Serial ATA II Extension
to Serial ATA 1.0a Specification.
It is recommended to use the pre-charge resistor for protection from over current at
+5V power supply circuit in the host system when the disk drive is hot-plugged.
(Refer to the Serial ATA II Extension to Serial ATA 1.0a Specification.)
The equivalent circuit of +5V power supply at Hot Plugging is in the following
figure.
It is necessary to choose pre-charge resistor R value, which is in permissible
L
range of +5V power supply specification at the host system.
Refer to the equivalent circuit when the optimized value of pre-charge resistor R .
L
It is recommended to choose the minimum value which is in permissible range of
+5V power supply specification at the host system. Because it is possible that
rush current occurs again when P8, P9 pin connection after P7 (+5V pre-charge
pin) connection dependent on the insertion speed.
C141-E249
5-13
Interface
5.2 Logical Interface
The host system and the device communicate with each other by sending and
receiving serial data.
The host and the device have several dedicated communication layers between
them. These layers have different functions, enabling communication between the
different levels of layers within the host or device and between layers at the same
level that link the host and device.
Figure 5.3 is a conceptual diagram of the communication layers.
Application
layer 4
Device:
Host:
Software control
Buffer memory
DMA engine(s)
Software control
Buffer Memory
DMA engine(s)
Transport
layer 3
Shadow Block Register
Block Register
Transport Layer
Transport Layer
Link
layer 2
Link Layer
Link Layer
Physical
layer 1
Physical Layer
Physical Layer
Host located layers
Device located layers
Figure 5.3 Conceptual diagram of communication layers
5-14
C141-E249
5.2 Logical Interface
5.2.1 Communication layers
Each of the layers is outlined below.
Physical layer
•
•
Detects, sends, and receives band signals.
Sends serial data to and receives it from the link layer.
Link layer
•
Negotiates against mutual transfer requests between the host system and
device.
•
•
Encodes serial data as 10- or 8-bit data, then converts it into DWORD data.
Inserts auxiliary signals (SOF, CRC, and EOF), deletes auxiliary signals, and
communicates with the transport and physical layers.
Transport layer
•
Exchanges data in communication with the link layer, and builds the frame
information structure (FIS).
•
•
Contains a (Shadow) Block Register.
Reflects the FIS contents to the Block Register.
C141-E249
5-15
Interface
5.2.2 Outline of the Shadow Block Register
Each transport layer in the host system and device has a block register, which is
called a Shadow Block Register in the host system, and a Block Register in the
device.
These registers are used when the host system issues a command to the device.
Table 5.4 Shadow Block Register
Command Block registers
Read
Error
Write
Data Port
Features
Sector Count (exp)
Sector Count
Sector Count (exp)
Sector Count
Sector Number
Cylinder Low
Cylinder High
Sector Number (exp)
Cylinder Low (exp)
Cylinder High (exp)
Sector Number
Cylinder Low
Cylinder High
Sector Number (exp)
Cylinder Low (exp)
Cylinder High (exp)
Device / Head
Status
Command
Control Block registers
Alternate Status
Device Control
Note: Each of the Sector Count, Sector Number, Cylinder Low, and Cylinder
High fields has a higher-order field used for issuing the Ext command.
The fields are called Sector Count exp, Sector Number exp, Cylinder
Low exp, and Cylinder High exp, respectively. For information on
writing data to these fields, see "Device Control Field."
5-16
C141-E249
5.2 Logical Interface
5.2.3 Outline of the frame information structure (FIS)
The transport layer converts data written in a Block Register into the FIS, and
sends it to the upper layer.
The FIS, which is generated in the transport layer, is explained below.
5.2.3.1 FIS types
The types of FIS are as follows (Each FIS is referred to as abbreviation in square
brackets in this manual.):
•
•
•
•
Register- Host to Device [RegHD]
Register- Device to Host [RegDH]
DMA Active – Device to Host [DMA Active]
DMA Setup – Device to Host or Host to Device (Bidirectional)
[DMA Setup]
•
•
•
•
Set Device Bits – Device to Host [SetDB]
BIST Active – Bidirectional [BIST Active]
PIO Setup – Device to Host [PIO Setup]
Data – Host to Device or Device to Host (Bidirectional) [DATA]
5.2.3.2 Register - Host to Device
The Register - Host to Device FIS has the following layout:
3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Features
Command
C R R Reserved (0)
FIS Type (27h)
0
1
2
3
4
Device
LBA High
LBA Mid
LBA Low
Features (exp)
Control
LBA High (exp)
Reserved (0)
Reserved (0)
LBA Mid (exp)
Sector Count (exp)
Reserved (0)
LBA Low (exp)
Sector Count
Reserved (0)
Reserved (0)
Figure 5.4 Register - Host to Device FIS layout
C141-E249
5-17
Interface
The host system uses the Register - Host to Device FIS when information in the
Register Block is transferred from the host system to the device. This is the
mechanism for issuing the ATA command from the host system to the device.
C - To update the Command field, "1" would be set in this field; and to update the
Device Control field, "0" would be set in the field.
If both C = 1 and SRST = 1 are set, operation is not guaranteed.
5.2.3.3 Register - Device to Host
The Register - Device to Host FIS has the following layout:
3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Error
Status
R I R Reserved (0)
FIS Type (34h)
0
1
2
3
4
Device
LBA High
LBA Mid
LBA Low
Reserved (0)
Reserved (0)
Reserved (0)
LBA High (exp)
Reserved (0)
Reserved (0)
LBA Mid (exp)
Sector Count (exp)
Reserved (0)
LBA Low (exp) (0)
Sector Count
Reserved (0)
Figure 5.5 Register - Device to Host FIS layout
The Register - Device to Host FIS is used when information concerning the Shadow
Register Block in the host adapter is updated. This FIS indicates that the device has
completed a command operation. Furthermore, this is a mechanism for changing
information concerning the Shadow Register Block of the host adapter.
I - If this bit is set, an interrupt request is issued to the host system.
5.2.3.4 DMA Active - Device to Host
The DMA Active - Device to Host FIS has the following layout:
3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved (0)
Reserved (0)
R R R Reserved (0)
FIS Type (39h)
0
Figure 5.6 DMA Active - Device to Host FIS layout
The host uses the DMA Active - Device to Host FIS layout. This FIS instructs the
host to continue transferring DMA data from the host to the device.
5-18
C141-E249
5.2 Logical Interface
5.2.3.5 DMA Setup - Device to Host or Host to Device (Bidirectional)
The DMA Setup - Device to Host or Host to Device FIS has the following layout:
3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved (0)
Reserved (0)
A I D Reserved (0)
FIS Type (41h)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
TAG
0
Reserved (0)
DMA Buffer Offset
DMA Transfer Count
Reserved (0)
Figure 5.7 DMA Setup - Device to Host or Host to Device FIS layout
The DMA Setup - Device to Host or Host to Device FIS communicates the start of
a first-party DMA access to the host system. This FIS is used to request the host
system or device to set up the DMA controller before the start of a DMA data
transfer.
A - Auto Active bit. If this bit is cleared ("0" is set for the bit), it indicates that a
DMA Active FIS transfer is required before a Data FIS transfer.
D - Direction bit. If this bit is set ("1" is set for the bit), it indicates that the data
transfer direction is from the device to the host system.
C141-E249
5-19
Interface
5.2.3.6 BIST Active - Bidirectional
The BIST Active - Bidirectional FIS has the following layout:
3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved (0)
Data [31:24]
Data [31:24]
Pattern definition
T A S L F P R V
Data [23:16]
R R R Reserved (0)
FIS Type (58h)
0
1
2
Data [23:16]
Data [7:0]
Data [23:16]
Data [23:16]
Data [7:0]
Figure 5.8 BIST Active - Bidirectional FIS layout
The BIST Active - Bidirectional FIS is used to set the receiver to Loop Back
mode. This FIS can be sent by either the host system or device.
The following combinations of pattern definitions are supported:
Table 5.5 BIST combinations
SC
Reg
T
A
S
L
F
P
V
Contents
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
1
-
-
-
-
1
-
09h SATA Phy Analog Loopback Mode
10h Far End Retimed Loopback Mode
C0h No ALIGN Transmit_only Mode (Scramble ON)
(*1)
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
E0h No ALIGN Transmit_only Mode (Scramble OFF)
C4h No ALIGN Transmit_only with primitive Mode
(Scramble ON) (*1)
1
E4h No ALIGN Transmit_only with primitive Mode
(Scramble OFF)
1
1
1
-
-
1
-
1
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
80h ALIGN Transmit_only Mode (Scramble ON) (*1)
A0h ALIGN Transmit_only Mode (Scramble OFF)
1
84h ALIGN Transmit_only with primitive Mode
(Scramble ON) (*1)
1
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
1
-
-
A4h ALIGN Transmit_only with primitive Mode
(Scramble OFF)
1
5-20
C141-E249
5.2 Logical Interface
5.2.3.7 Data - Host to Device or Device to Host (Bidirectional)
This Data FIS has the following layout:
3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved (0)
Reserved (0)
R R R Reserved (0)
FIS Type (46h)
0
…
…
n
N Dwords of data
(1 to 2048 Dwords)
Figure 5.9 Data FIS (Bidirectional) layout
The Data FIS is used for data transfers between the host system and device.
5.2.3.8 PIO Setup – Device to Host
Error
Status
R I D Reserved (0)
Cyl Low
FIS Type (5Fh)
Sector Number
0
1
2
3
4
Dev / Head
Reserved (0)
E_Status
Cyl High
Cyl High (exp)
Reserved (0)
Cyl Low (exp)
Sector Num (exp) (0)
Sector Count
Sector Count (exp)
Reserved (0)
Transfer Count
Figure 5.10 PIO Setup - Device to Host FIS layout
The PIO Setup FIS is a device to host FIS, FIS Type 5Fh. The PIO Setup FIS is
used by the device to provide the host adapter with the data transfer count and
DRQ block status during the PIO data phase. This information allows the host
adapter to control PIO data transfers. There are two command structure Response
mappings into a Response FIS in the serial transport.
a) 48-bit command structure PIO Setup mapping
b) 28-bit command structure PIO Setup mapping
C141-E249
5-21
Interface
FIS Type -
Cyl Low -
Cyl Low (exp) -
Cyl High -
Cyl High (exp) -
D -
Set to a value of 5Fh. Defines the rest of the FIS fields.
Defines the length of the FIS as five Dwords.
Holds the contents of the cylinder low register of the
Command Block.
Contains the contents of the expanded address field of the
Shadow Register Block.
Holds the contents of the cylinder high register of the
Command Block.
Contains the contents of the expanded address field of the
Shadow Register Block.
Indicates whether host memory is being written or read by
the device.
1 = write (device to host), 0 = read (host to device).
Dev / Head -
Holds the contents of the device / head register of the
Command Block.
Dev / Head (exp) - Contains the contents of the expanded address field of the
Shadow Register Block.
E_Status -
Contains the new value of the status register of the task file
block for correct synchronization of data transfers to host.
Error -
Contains the new value of the Error register of the Command
Block at the conclusion of all subsequent Data to Device
frames.
I -
Interrupt bit. This bit reflects the interrupt bit line of the device
Reserved (0)
R -
Sector Count -
Holds the contents of the sector count register of the
Command Block.
Sector Count (exp) - Contains the contents of the expanded address field of the
Shadow Register Block.
Sector Number -
Holds the contents of the sector number register of the
Command Block.
Sector Num (exp) - Contains the contents of the expanded address field of the
Shadow Register Block.
Status -
Contains the new value of the status register of the Command
Block at the conclusion of all subsequent PIO Data to Device
frames.
Transfer Count -
Holds the number of bytes to be transferred in the subsequent
data FIS.
5-22
C141-E249
5.2 Logical Interface
5.2.3.9 Set Device Bits – Device to Host
Error
R Status Hi R Status Lo R
I
R
Reserved (0)
FIS Type (A1h)
0
1
SActive 31:0
Figure 5.11 Set Device Bits FIS
The Set Device Bits -
Device to Host FIS is used by the device to load Shadow Command
Block bits for which the device has exclusive write access. These
bits are the eight bits of the Error register and six of the eight bits of
the Status register. This FIS does not alter bit 7, BSY, or bit 3, DRQ,
of the Shadow Status register.
FIS Type -
Set to a value of A1h. Defines the rest of the FIS fields. Defines the
length of the FIS as two Dwords.
I -
Interrupt Bit. This bit signals the host adapter to enter an interrupt
pending state if both the BSY bit and the DRQ bit in the shadow
Status register are zero when the frame is received.
Error -
Contains the new value of the Error register of the Shadow Register
Block.
Status-Hi -
Contains the new value of bits 6, 5, and 4 of the Status register of
the Shadow Register Block.
Status-Lo - Contains the new value of bits 2,1, and 0 of the Status register of
the Shadow Register Block.
SActive -
The SActive field of the Set Device Bits FIS communicates
successful completion notification for each of up to 32 queued
commands. The field is bit-significant and the device sets bit
positions to one for each command tag it is indicating successful
completion notification for. The device may set more than one bit
to one if it is explicitly aggregating successful status returns. The
device shall only indicate completion notification for a command if
it has completed successfully.
C141-E249
5-23
Interface
5.2.4 Shadow block registers
(1) Error Field
The Error Field indicates the status of the command executed by the device.
The fields are valid when the ERR bit of the Status field is 1.
This register contains a diagnostic code after power is turned on, the COMRESET
or the EXECUTIVE DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC command is executed.
•
[Status at the completion of command execution other than diagnostic
command]
Bit 7
X
Bit 6
UNC
Bit 5
X
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
IDNF/ SFRW
SFRR
ABRT TK0NF AMNF
X:
Unused
- Bit 7: Unused
- Bit 6: Uncorrectable Data Error (UNC). This bit indicates that an
uncorrectable data error has been encountered.
- Bit 5: Unused
- Bit 4: ID Not Found (IDNF). This bit indicates an error except for bad sector,
uncorrectable error and SB not found.
Or, SATA Frame Error Write (SFRW) This bit indicates that a SATA
communication error has been encountered during the write process.
In this case, bit4 and bit2 are set both.
- Bit 3: SATA Frame Error Read (SF RR). This bit indicates that a SATA
communication error has been encountered during the read process.
In this case, bit3 and bit2 are set both.
- Bit 2: Aborted Command (ABRT). This bit indicates that the requested
command was aborted due to a device status error (e.g. Not Ready,
Write Fault) or the command code was invalid.
- Bit 1: Track 0 Not Found (TK0NF). This bit indicates that track 0 was not
found during RECALIBRATE command execution.
- Bit 0: Address Mark Not Found (AMNF). This bit indicates that the SB Not
Found error occurred.
[Diagnostic code]
- X’00’: Format Unit is not completed.
- X’01’: No Error Detected.
- X’02’: HDC Diagnostic Error
- X’03’: Data Buffer Diagnostic Error.
- X’04’: Memory Diagnostic Error.
5-24
C141-E249
5.2 Logical Interface
- X’05’: Reading the system area is abnormal.
- X’06’: Calibration is abnormal.
(2) Features Field (exp)
The Features Field provides specific feature to a command. For instance, it is used
with SET FEATURES command to enable or disable caching.
(3) Sector Count Field (exp)
The Sector Count Field indicates the number of sectors of data to be transferred in
a read or write operation between the host system and the device. When the value
in this field is X’00’, the sector count is 256. With the EXT system command, the
sector count is 65536 when value of the Sector Count Field is X'00' and that of the
Sector Count Field (exp) is X’00’.
When this field indicates 0 at the completion of the command execution, this
indicates that the command is completed successfully. If the command is not
completed successfully, this field indicates the number of sectors to be transferred
to complete the request from the host system. That is, this field indicates the
number of remaining sectors that the data has not been transferred due to the error.
However, as of the last sector of PIO transfer, SC=1 indicates the normal
completion.
The contents of this field also have other definitions (Refer to 5.4)
(4) Sector Number Field (exp)
The contents of this field indicates the starting sector number for the subsequent
command. The sector number should be between X’01’ and [the number of
sectors per track defined by INITIALIZE DEVICE PARAMETERS command.
Under the LBA mode, this field indicates LBA bits 7 to 0. Under the LBA mode
of the EXT system command, LBA bits 31 to 24 are set in the Sector Number
Field, and LBA bits 7 to 0 are set in the Sector Number Field (exp).
(5) Cylinder Low Field (exp)
The contents of this field indicates low-order 8 bits of the starting cylinder address
for any disk-access.
At the end of a command, the contents of this field are updated to the current
cylinder number.
Under the LBA mode, this field indicates LBA bits 15 to 8. Under the LBA mode
of the EXT system command, LBA bits 39 to 32 are set in the Cylinder Low Field,
and LBA bits 15 to 8 are set in the Cylinder Low Field (exp).
C141-E249
5-25
Interface
(6) Cylinder High Field (exp)
The contents of this field indicates high-order 8 bits of the disk-access start
cylinder address.
At the end of a command, the contents of this field are updated to the current
cylinder number. The high-order 8 bits of the cylinder address are set to the
Cylinder High Register.
Under the LBA mode, this field indicates LBA bits 23 to 16. Under the LBA
mode of the EXT system command, LBA bits 47 to 40 are set in the Cylinder
High Field, and LBA bits 23 to 16 are set in the Cylinder High Field (exp).
(7) Device/Head Field
The contents of this field indicate the device and the head number.
When executing INITIALIZE DEVICE PARAMETERS command, the contents
of this field defines “the number of heads minus 1” (a maximum head No.).
Bit 7
X
Bit 6
L
Bit 5
X
Bit 4
X
Bit 3
HS3
Bit 2
HS2
Bit 1
HS1
Bit 0
HS0
- Bit 7: Unused
- Bit 6:
L
0 for CHS mode and 1 for LBA mode.
- Bit 5: Unused
- Bit 4: Unused
- Bit 3: HS3
CHS mode head address 3 (23). bit 27 for LBA mode.
Unused under the LBA mode of the EXT command.
- Bit 2: HS2
- Bit 1: HS1
- Bit 0: HS0
CHS mode head address 2 (22). bit 26 for LBA mode.
Unused under the LBA mode of the EXT command.
CHS mode head address 1 (21). bit 25 for LBA mode.
Unused under the LBA mode of the EXT command.
CHS mode head address 0 (20). bit 24 for LBA mode.
Unused under the LBA mode of the EXT command.
5-26
C141-E249
5.2 Logical Interface
(8) Status field
The contents of this field indicate the status of the device. The contents of this
field are updated at the completion of each command. When the BSY bit is 1,
other bits of this field, are invalid.
Bit 7
BSY
Bit 6
Bit 5
DF
Bit 4
DSC
Bit 3
DRQ
Bit 2
0
Bit 1
0
Bit 0
ERR
DRDY
- Bit 7:
Busy (BSY) bit.
This bit is set whenever the Command filed of the shadow block registers for the
host system is accessed.
Then this bit is cleared when the command is completed. However, even if a
command is being executed, this bit is cleared during the PIO data transfer request.
When BSY bit is 1, the host system should not write the shadow block registers.
This bit is set by the device under following conditions:
(a) After COMRESET or SRST is set in the Device Control Field, the BSY bit is
set, then the BSY bit is cleared, when the COMRESET process is completed.
The BSY bit is set for no longer than 15 seconds after the IDD accepts reset.
Device Ready (DRDY) bit.
- Bit 6:
- Bit 5:
This bit indicates that the device is capable to respond to a command.
The IDD checks its status when it receives a command. If an error is detected (not
ready state), the IDD clears this bit to 0. This is cleared to 0 at power-on and it is
cleared until the rotational speed of the spindle motor reaches the steady speed.
Device Write Fault (DF) bit.
This bit indicates that a device fault (write fault) condition has been detected.
If a write fault is detected during command execution, this bit is latched and
retained until the device accepts the next command or reset.
- Bit 4:
- Bit 3:
Device Seek Complete (DSC) bit.
This bit indicates that the device heads are positioned over a track.
In the IDD, this bit is always set to 1 after the spin-up control is completed.
Data Request (DRQ) bit.
This bit indicates that the device is ready to transfer PIO data of word unit or byte
unit between the host system and the device.
Always 0.
- Bit 2:
- Bit 1:
- Bit 0:
Always 0.
Error (ERR) bit.
This bit indicates that an error was detected while the previous command was
being executed. The Error field indicates the additional information of the cause
for the error.
C141-E249
5-27
Interface
(9) Command Field
The Command Field contains a command code being sent to the device. After this
field is written, the command execution starts immediately.
Table 5.3 lists the executable commands and their command codes. This table
also lists the necessary parameters for each command which are written to certain
fields before the Command register is written.
(10) Device Control Field
The Device Control Field contains software reset.
Bit 7
X
Bit 6
X
Bit 5
X
Bit 4
X
Bit 3
X
Bit 2
Bit 1
X
Bit 0
0
SRST
- Bit 2:
Software Reset (SRST)
This is the host software reset bit. When this bit is set, the device is held reset state.
The slave device is not required to execute the DASP- handshake.
(11) E_Status Field
This field is in the PIO Setup FIS. The field contents are the same as those
described in (8), "Status Field." However, the values in the Status field are those
before a PIO data transfer, and the values in the E_Status field are those when a
PIO data transfer is completed.
(12) DMA Buffer Offset Field
This field is in the DMA Setup FIS, representing byte offset. Since this device
does not support byte offset, 0 is always set for the field.
(13) DMA Transfer Count Field
This field is in the DMA Setup FIS, representing the number of bytes to be
transferred.
(14) Active Field
This field is in the Set Device Bits FIS. Each bit number corresponds to the tag
number of one of 32 commands that can be placed in a queue, and the bit setting
of "1" indicates that the corresponding command is completed.
5-28
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
5.3 Host Commands
The host system issues a command to the device by writing necessary parameters
in related fileds in the shadow block registers and writing a command code in the
Command field of the shadow block registers.
The device can accept the command when the BSY bit is 0 (the device is not in the
busy status).
The host system can halt the uncompleted command execution only at execution
of COMRESET or software reset.
When the BSY bit is 1 or the DRQ bit is 1 (the device is requesting the PIO data
transfer) and the host system writes to the command field of the shadow block
register, the correct device operation is not guaranteed.
5.3.1 Command code and parameters
Table 5.6 lists the supported commands, command code and the related fields to
be written necessary parameters at command execution.
Table 5.6 Command code and parameters (1/3)
COMMAND CODE (Bit)
PARAMETER USED
COMMAND NAME
RECALIBRATE
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
6
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
5
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
4
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
3
X
0
2
X
0
1
X
0
0
X
R
R
0
FR SC SN CY DH
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
D
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
D
READ SECTOR(S)
WRITE SECTOR(S)
0
0
0
WRITE VERIFY
1
1
0
READ VERIFY SECTOR(S)
SEEK
0
0
0
R
X
0
X
0
X
0
X
0
EXECUTE DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC
INITIALIZE DEVICE PARAMETERS
DOWNLOAD MICROCODE
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
STANDBY IMMEDIATE
IDLE IMMEDIATE
UNLOAD IMMEDIATE
STANDBY
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
Y
N
Y
Y
N
N
Y
Y
N
D
D
D
D
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
C141-E249
5-29
Interface
Table 5.6 Command code and parameters (2/3)
COMMAND CODE (Bit)
PARAMETER USED
FR SC SN CY DH
COMMAND NAME
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
IDLE
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
D
D
D
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
CHECK POWER MODE
SLEEP
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
SMART
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
D
D
DEVICE CONFIGURATION
READ MULTIPLE
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
R
R
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N*
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
D
Y
Y
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
WRITE MULTIPLE
SET MULTIPLE MODE
READ DMA
WRITE DMA
READ BUFFER
FLUSH CACHE
WRITE BUFFER
IDENTIFY DEVICE
IDENTIFY DEVICE DMA
SET FEATURES
SECURITY SET PASSWORD
SECURITY UNLOCK
SECURITY ERASE PREPARE
SECURITY ERASE UNIT
SECURITY FREEZE LOCK
SECURITY DISABLE
PASSWORD
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
N
N
N
N
D
READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS
SET MAX
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
N
N*
N
N
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
D
Y
D
D
READ SECTOR(S) EXT
READ DMA EXT
N
READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS
EXT
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
N
N
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
D
D
READ MULTIPLE EXT
5-30
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
Table 5.6 Command code and parameters (3/3)
COMMAND CODE (Bit)
PARAMETER USED
COMMAND NAME
READ LOG EXT
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
5
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
4
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
3
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
2
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
FR SC SN CY DH
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
D
D
D
Y
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
WRITE SECTOR(S) EXT
WRITE DMA EXT
SET MAX ADDRESS EXT
WRITE MULTIPLE EXT
WRITE LOG EXT
READ VERIFY SECTOR(S) EXT
FLUSH CACHE EXT
WRITE MULTIPLE FUA EXT
WRITE DMA FUA EXT
READ FP DMA QUEUED
WRITE FP DMA QUEUED
CY: cylinder field
DH: device/head field
FR: features field
SC: sector count field
SN: sector number field
R: Retry at error
1 = Without retry
0 = With retry
Y: Necessary to set parameters
Y*: Necessary to set parameters under the LBA mode.
N: Not necessary to set parameters (The parameter is ignored if it is
set.)
N*: May set parameters
D: The device parameter is valid, and the head parameter is ignored.
X: Do not care
C141-E249
5-31
Interface
5.3.2 Command descriptions
The contents of the shadow block registers to be necessary for issuing a command
and the example indication of the shadow block registers at command completion
are shown as following in this subsection.
Example: READ SECTOR (S)
At command issuance
At command completion
(Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
(Shadow Block Registers to be read)
Bit
CM
7
0
x
6
0
5
1
x
4
0
x
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
0
Bit
ST
7
x
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Status information
HD No./LBA
LBA(47-40)
DH
L
HD No./LBA
DH
L
x
x
CH EXP
LBA(47-40)
CH EXP
Start cylinder address
[MSB] / LBA(23-16)
End cylinder address
[MSB] / LBA(23-16)
CH
CL EXP
CL
CH
CL EXP
CL
LBA(39-32)
LBA(39-32)
Start cylinder address
[LSB] / LBA(15-8)
End cylinder address
[LSB] / LBA(15-8)
SN EXP
SN
LBA(31-24)
Start sector No. / LBA (7-0)
Transfer sector count (15-8)
Transfer sector count (7-0)
xx
SN EXP
SN
LBA(31-24)
End sector No. / LBA (7-0)
SC EXP
SC
SC EXP
SC
X ' 00 '
X ' 00 '
FR EXP
FR
ER
Error information
xx
CH (EXP): Cylinder High Field (EXP)
CL (EXP): Cylinder Low Field (EXP)
CM:
DH:
ER:
Command Field
Device/Head Field
Error Field
FR (EXP): Features Field (EXP)
L: LBA (Logical Block Address) setting bit
SN (EXP): Sector Number Field (EXP)
SC (EXP): Sector Count Field (EXP)
ST:
Status Field
x, xx:
Don't care (setting is not necessary)
Note:
1. When the L bit is specified to 1, the lower 4 bits of the DH
field and all bits of the CH field, CL and SN fields indicate
the LBA bits (bits of the DH filed are the MSB (most
significant bit) and bits of the SN field are the LSB (least
significant bit).
2. At error occurrence, the SC field indicates the remaining sector
count of data transfer.
3. Bit indication is omitted in each command description.
5-32
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
(1) RECALIBRATE (X’10’ to X’1F’)
This command performs the calibration. When the device completes the
calibration, the device reports the status to the host system.
This command can be issued in the LBA mode.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) An error was detected during head positioning (ST = 51h, ER = 02h).
(2) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
0
x
0
x
0
x
1
x
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
Note:
Also executable in LBA mode.
C141-E249
5-33
Interface
(2) READ SECTOR(S) (X’20’ or X’21’)
This command reads data of sectors specified in the Sector Count field from the
address specified in the Device/Head, Cylinder High, Cylinder Low and Sector
Number fields. Number of sectors can be specified from 1 to 256 sectors. To
specify 256 sectors reading, ‘00’ is specified. For the protocols related to data
transfer, see Subsection 5.4.1.
If the head is not on the track specified by the host, the device performs an implied
seek. After the head reaches to the specified track, the device reads the target
sector.
If an error occurs, retry reads are attempted to read the target sector before
reporting an error, irrespective of the R bit setting.
If an error does not occur, PIO Setup is always transferred prior to the data
transfer.
Upon the completion of the command execution, shadow block registers contain
the cylinder, head, and sector addresses (in the CHS mode) or logical block
address (in the LBA mode) of the last sector read.
If an unrecoverable disk read error occurs in a sector, the read operation is terminated
at the sector where the error occurred. Shadow block registers contain the cylinder,
the head, and the sector addresses of the sector (in the CHS mode) or the logical
block address (in the LBA mode) where the error occurred, and remaining number
of sectors of which data was not transferred (including sector when the error
occurred).
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A specified address exceeds the range where read operations are allowed
(ST = 51h, ER = 10h).
(2) The range where read operations are allowed will be exceeded by an address
during a read operation (ST = 51h, ER = 10h).
(3) An uncorrectable disk read error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 40h).
(4) The sync byte indicating the beginning of a sector was not found
(ST = 51h, ER = 01h).
(5) A communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 0Ch).
(6) An error other than the above errors occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
5-34
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
0
x
0
1
x
0
x
0
0
0
R
L
HD No. / LBA
CH
Start cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA
Start cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA
CL
SN
Start sector No.
Transfer sector count
xx
/ LBA [LSB]
SC
FR
(R: Retry)
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
HD No. / LBA
x
L
x
x
End cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA
End cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA
End sector No.
/ LBA [LSB]
01 (*1)
Error information
*1 If the command is terminated due to an error, the remaining
number of sectors of which data was not transferred.
C141-E249
5-35
Interface
(3) WRITE SECTOR(S) (X’30’ or X’31’)
This command writes data of sectors from the address specified in the
Device/Head, Cylinder High, Cylinder Low, and Sector Number fields to the
address specified in the Sector Count field. Number of sectors can be specified
from 1 to 256 sectors. A sector count of 0 requests 256 sectors. Data transfer
begins at the sector specified in the Sector Number field. For the protocols related
to data transfer, see Subsection 5.4.3.
If the head is not on the track specified by the host, the device performs an implied
seek. After the head reaches to the specified track, the device writes the target
sector.
If an error occurs when writing to the target sector, retries are attempted
irrespectively of the R bit setting.
The data stored in the buffer, and CRC code and ECC bytes are written to the data
field of the corresponding sector(s).
Upon the completion of the command execution, the shadow block registers
contain the cylinder, head, and sector addresses of the last sector written.
If an disk error occurs during multiple sector write operation, the write operation is
terminated at the sector where the error occurred. Shadow block registers contain
the cylinder, the head, the sector addresses (in the CHS mode) or the logical block
address (in the LBA mode) of the sector where the error occurred.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A specified address exceeds the range where write operations are allowed
(after a transfer of dummy data, ST = 51h, ER = 10h).
(2) The range where write operations are allowed will be exceeded by an address
during a write operation (after a transfer of dummy data, ST = 51h, ER = 10h).
(3) A write fault was detected when the write cache was disabled
(ST = 71h, ER = 10h).
(4) While the write cache is enabled, if the status indicating a completed transfer
(STS = 50h) is returned and a data write operation failed because a write fault
was detected during the data write operation, Abort will be returned for all
subsequent ATA commands (ST = 71h, ER = 04h). This state is cleared the
next time that the device is turned on.
(5) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
(6) An error other than the above errors occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
5-36
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
0
x
0
1
x
1
x
0
0
0
R
L
HD No. / LBA
CH
Start cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA
Start cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA
CL
SN
Start sector No.
Transfer sector count
xx
/ LBA [LSB]
SC
FR
(R: Retry)
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
HD No. / LBA
x
L
x
x
End cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA
End cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA
End sector No.
/ LBA [LSB]
00 (*1)
Error information
*1 If the command was terminated because of an error, the number
of sectors for which data has not been written is set in this field.
C141-E249
5-37
Interface
(4) WRITE VERIFY (X’3C’)
This command operates similarly to the WRITE SECTOR(S) command except
that the device verifies each sector immediately after being written. The verify
operation is a read and check for data errors without data transfer. Any error that
is detected during the verify operation is posted.
After all sectors are verified, device reports the status to the host system.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A specified address exceeds the range where write operations are allowed
(after a transfer of dummy data, ST = 51h, ER = 10h).
(2) The range where write operations are allowed will be exceeded by an address
during a write operation (after a transfer of dummy data, ST = 51h, ER = 10h).
(3) A write fault was detected when the write cache was disabled
(ST = 71h, ER = 10h).
(4) While the write cache is enabled, if the status indicating a completed transfer
(STS = 50h) is returned and a data write operation failed because a write fault
was detected during the data write operation, Abort will be returned for all
subsequent ATA commands (ST = 71h, ER = 04h). This state is cleared the
next time that the device is turned on.
(5) An uncorrectable read error occurred disk (ST = 51h, ER = 40h).
(6) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
(7) An error other than the above errors occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
0
x
0
1
x
1
x
1
1
0
0
L
HDNo. /LBA
Start cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA
Start cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA
Start sector No.
Transfer sector count
xx
/ LBA [LSB]
5-38
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
HD No. / LBA
x
L
x
x
Start cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA
Start cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA
Start sector No.
/ LBA [LSB]
00 (*1)
Error information
*1 If the command is terminated because of an error, the number of
remaining sectors for which data has not been written or verified is
set in this register.
C141-E249
5-39
Interface
(5) READ VERIFY SECTOR(S) (X’40’ or X’41’)
This command operates similarly to the READ SECTOR(S) command except that
the data is not transferred to the host system.
After all requested sectors are verified, the device reports the status to the host
system.
Upon the completion of the command execution, the shadow block registers
contain the cylinder, head, and sector number of the last sector verified.
If an unrecoverable disk error occurs, the verify operation is terminated at the
sector where the error occurred. The shadow block registers contain the cylinder,
the head, and the sector addresses (in the CHS mode) or the logical block address
(in the LBA mode) of the sector where the error occurred. The Sector Count field
indicates the number of sectors that have not been verified.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A specified address exceeds the range where read operations are allowed
(ST = 51h, ER = 10h).
(2) The range where read operations are allowed will be exceeded by an address
during a read operation (ST = 51h, ER = 10h).
(3) An uncorrectable disk read error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 40h).
(4) The sync byte indicating the beginning of a sector was not found
(ST = 51h, ER = 01h).
(5) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 01h).
(6) An error other than the above errors occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
0
x
1
0
x
0
x
0
0
0
R
L
HD No. / LBA
Start cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA
Start cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA
Start sector No.
Transfer sector count
xx
/ LBA [LSB]
5-40
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
HD No. / LBA
x
L
x
x
Start cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA
Start cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA
Start sector No.
/ LBA [LSB]
00 (*1)
Error information
*1 If the command is terminated due to an error, the remaining
number of sectors of which data was not transferred is set in this
register.
C141-E249
5-41
Interface
(6) SEEK (X’70’ to X’7F’)
This command performs a seek operation to the track and selects the head
specified in the command block registers. After completing the seek operation,
the device reports the status to the host system.
In the LBA mode, this command performs the seek operation to the cylinder and
head position in which the sector is specified.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A specified address exceeds the range where the head can be positioned
(ST = 51h, ER = 10h).
(2) Head positioning is not possible because an error occurred
(ST = 51h, ER = 10h).
(3) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
0
x
1
1
x
1
x
x
x
x
x
L
HD No. / LBA
Start cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA
Start cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA
Start sector No.
/ LBA [LSB]
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
HD No. / LBA
x
L
x
x
Start cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA
Start cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA
Start sector No.
/ LBA [LSB]
xx
Error information
5-42
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
(7) EXECUTE DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC (X’90’)
This command performs an internal diagnostic test (self-diagnosis) of the device.
The device reports the diagnostic result and status to the host.
Table 5.7 lists the diagnostic code written in the Error field which is 8-bit code.
Table 5.7 Diagnostic code
Code
Result of diagnostic
Format Unit is not completed.
X’00’
X’01’
X’02’
X’03’
X’04’
X’05’
X’06’
No error detected.
HDC diagnostic error
Data buffer diagnostic error
Memory diagnostic error
Reading the system area is abnormal
Calibration abnormal
Note:
The device responds to this command with the result of
power-on diagnostic test.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
0
x
0
x
1
x
0
0
0
0
HD No. /LBA
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH)
CL
SN
SC
Status information
HD No. /LBA
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
01H
01H
ER
Diagnostic code
C141-E249
5-43
Interface
(8) INITIALIZE DEVICE PARAMETERS (X’91’)
The host system can set the number of sectors per track and the maximum head
number (maximum head number is “number of heads minus 1”) per cylinder with
this command. Upon receipt of this command, the device sets the parameters.
Then the device reports the status to the host system.
When the SC field is specified to X’00’, an ABORTED COMMAND error is
posted. Other than X’00’ is specified, this command terminates normally.
The parameters set by this command are retained even after soft reset and
COMRESET issuance or power save operation regardless of the setting of
disabling the reverting to default setting.
The operation is always performed in CHS mode, with the command ignoring any
setting of LBA mode.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) "00h" is specified in the SC field (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(2) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
0
x
0
x
1
x
0
0
0
1
Max. head No.
xx
xx
xx
Number of sectors/track
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
Max. head No.
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
Number of sectors/track
Error information
5-44
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
(9) DOWNLOAD MICROCODE (X’92’)
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
1
0
x
0
1
1
x
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
00
00
Sector count (15-8)
Sector count (7-0)
Subcommand code
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
1
x
1
x
0
0
0
0
00
00
xx
xx
Error information
This command rewrites the microcode of the device (firmware).
When this command is accepted, the device does beginning the data transfer of the
microcode or the microcode rewriting according to Subcommand code (Rewriting is
also possible simultaneously with the data transfer). Refer to Table 5.8.
In the data transfer of Subcommand code:01h, transfer by which data is divided
into multiple times is possible. Refer to Table 5.9.
After the designation of rewriting by Subcommand code:07h, reactivates in the
device for the update of the rewriting microcode of the microcode.
Table 5.8 Operation of DOWNLOAD MICROCODE
Host Command
Subcommand code
Movement of device
Sector count
Data transfer
Microcode rewriting execution
(FR Field)
(SN, SC Field)
0000h
xxxxh
0000h
xxxxh
−
Non
It is.
Non
It is.
Rewriting execution reservation
Rewriting execution reservation
Execution. **
01h
07h
Execution. **
Excluding 01h and 07h
Abort
C141-E249
5-45
Interface
**: In the following cases, Subcommand code=07h returns Abort as an error
though becomes Microcode rewriting execution specification.
1) Abnormality of the transmitted Microcode data is detected.
2) The data transfer is not done (The number of transfer: 0).
3) The DOWNLOAD MICROCODE command is not continuously issued when
the transfer has been divided into multiple transfers.
Table 5.9 Example of rewriting procedure of data 512K Bytes (80000h Bytes)
of microcode
Transfer example 1:
Transfer of 128 KB (0 to 127 KB) from the
beginning
1) CMD = 92h SN, SC = 0100h FR = 0lh
Transfer from 128 to 255 KB
Transfer from 256 to 383 KB
Transfer from 384 to 511 KB
Firmware rewriting execution
2) CMD = 92h SN, SC = 0100h FR = 0lh
3) CMD = 92h SN, SC = 0100h FR = 0lh
4) CMD = 92h SN, SC = 0100h FR = 0lh
5) CMD = 92h SN, SC = 0000h FR = 07h
Transfer example 2:
1) CMD = 92h SN, SC = 0400h FR = 0lh
2) CMD = 92h SN, SC = 0000h FR = 07h
Transfer example 3:
Transfer of 512 KB
Firmware rewriting execution
1) CMD = 92h SN, SC = 0400h FR = 07h
Transfer of 512 KB and Firmware rewriting
execution
Transfer example 4:
1) CMD = 92h SN, SC = 0100h FR = 0lh
Transfer of 128 KB (0 to 127 KB) from the
beginning
2) CMD = 92h SN, SC = 0100h FR = 0lh
3) CMD = 92h SN, SC = 0100h FR = 0lh
4) CMD = 92h SN, SC = 0100h FR = 07h
Transfer from 128 to 255 KB
Transfer from 256 to 383 KB
Transfer from 384 to 511 KB and Firmware
rewriting execution
The Aborted Command error is reported if any of the following conditions is
satisfied: transferred microcode data is incorrect, firmware rewriting is specified
before microcode data is transferred, or the DOWNLOAD MICROCODE
command is not issued continuously when the transfer has been divided into
multiple transfers.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) When the transferred Micro code data error occurs
(ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(2) When writing is specified though the data has not transferred yet.
(ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(3) When the SATA frame error occurs. (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
(4) When detect the error other than the above mentioned.
(ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
5-46
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
(10) STANDBY IMMEDIATE (X’94’ or X’E0’)
Upon receipt of this command, the device enters the standby mode. The device
then reports the status to the host system. This command does not support the
APS timer function.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
X’94’ or X’E0’
x
x
x
x
Xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
x
Xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
C141-E249
5-47
Interface
(11) IDLE IMMEDIATE (X’95’ or X’E1’) /UNLOAD IMMEDIATE (X’95’ or X’E1’)
•
Default Function
Upon receipt of this command, the device enters the idle mode. Then, the device
reports the status to the host system. This command does not support the APS
timer function.
Error reporting conditions
(1) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
X’95’ or X’E1’
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
5-48
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
•
Unload Feature (Unload Immediate Command):
When the device received the IDLE IMMEDIATE command with the UNLOAD
FEATURE, the head(s) is unloaded to the ramp position. After the device
completed the unload operation, the INTRQ signal will be asserted and the BUSY
flag will be cleared. The time until the head(s) unload to the ramp position is
typically less than 500 milliseconds. This unload operation is not same as the
power management operation. The device just unloads the head(s), and not
executes the power consumption restraint operation. This unload operation effects
the normal (not emergency) load/unload guarantee count per the device life.
Even if the device executes reading look-ahead operation or executes writing
operation, the device unloads the head(s) to the ramp position as soon as possible
when received the IDLE IMMEDIATE command with the Unload Feature. When
the writing operation is stopped, the device keeps the unwritten data. And, the
device keeps the unloaded state until receiving a Soft Reset/ COMRESET, or a
new command except IDLE IMMEDIATE command with the Unload Feature.
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
X’E1’
x
x
x
x
xx
X’55’
X’4E’
X’4C’
xx
X’44’
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
X’C4’
xx
Error information
C141-E249
5-49
Interface
(12) STANDBY (X’96’ or X’E2’)
Upon receipt of this command, the device enters the standby mode. If the device
has already spun down, the spin-down sequence is not implemented.
If the Sector Count field has a value other than "0," the APS timer is set when the
command is received. When the device receives the command involving a seek
such as media access command, the device processes the command after transition
to Active mode. After that, the device enters the command waiting state, and the
timer starts to count down. If a command is not received within the period
specified as the APS timer value, the device automatically enters Standby mode.
If the Sector Count field value is "0" the APS timer is disabled when the command
is received.
Under the standby mode, the spindle motor is stopped. Thus, when the command
involving a seek such as READ SECTOR(s) command is received, the device
processes the command after driving the spindle motor.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
X’96’ or X’E2’
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
Period of timer
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
5-50
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
(13) IDLE (X’97’ or X’E3’)
Upon receipt of this command, the device enters the idle mode. The device report
the status even if the device has not fully entered the idle mode. If the spindle of
the device is already rotating, the spin-up sequence shall not be implemented.
By using this command, the APS (Automatic Power Standby) timer function is
enabled and the timer immediately starts the countdown. When the timer reaches
the specified value, the device enters standby mode. The APS timer is set to
prohibition if the Sector Count field's value was "0" when device has received this
command.
The period of timer count is set depending on the value of the Sector Count
register as shown below.
Sector Count field value
[X’00’]
Point of timer
Timeout disabled
0
1 to 240
241 to 251 [X’F1’ to X’FB’]
[X’01’ to X’F0’]
(Value × 5) seconds
((Value-240) × 30) min
21 minutes
252
253
[X’FC’]
[X’FD’]
8 hrs
254 to 255 [X’FE’ to X’FF’]
21 minutes 15 seconds
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
X’97’ or X’E3’
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
Period of timer
xx
C141-E249
5-51
Interface
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
5-52
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
(14) CHECK POWER MODE (X’98’ or X’E5’)
The host checks the power mode of the device with this command.
The host system can confirm the power save mode of the device by the contents of
the Sector Count field after executing this command.
The device sets the following field value. After that, the device reports the status
to the host system.
Power save mode
Sector Count field
X’00’
• During moving to Standby mode
• Standby mode
• Idle mode
X’FF’
X’FF’
• Active mode
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
X’98’ or X’E5’
x
x
x
x
xx
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
Status information
x
DH
x
x
x
xx
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
xx
xx
xx
X’00’ or X’FF’
Error information
C141-E249
5-53
Interface
(15) SLEEP (X’99’ or X’E6’)
This command is the only way to make the device enter the sleep mode.
Upon receipt of this command, the device enters the sleep mode, then reports the
status to the host system. The device report the status even if the device has not
fully entered the sleep mode.
In the sleep mode, the spindle motor is stopped.
The only way to release the device from sleep mode is to execute a software or
COMRESET.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
X’99’ or X’E6’
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
5-54
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
(16) SMART (X’B0’)
This command predicts the occurrence of device failures depending on the
subcommand specified in the Features field. If the Features field contains values
that are not supported with the command, the Aborted Command error is issued.
Before issuing the command, the host must set the key values in the Cylinder Low
and Cylinder High field (4Fh in the Cylinder Low field and C2h in the Cylinder
High field). If the key values are incorrect, the Aborted Command error is issued.
If the failure prediction function is disabled, the device returns the Aborted
Command error to subcommands other than those of the SMART Enable
Operations (with the Features field set to D8h).
If the failure prediction function is enabled, the device collects and updates data on
specific items. The values of items whose data is collected and updated by the
device in order to predict device failures are hereinafter referred to as attribute
values.
C141-E249
5-55
Interface
Table 5.10 Features Field values (subcommands) and functions (1/3)
Features Field
X’D0’
Function
SMART READ DATE:
A device that received this subcommand saves all the updated attribute
values. The device then transfers 512-byte attribute value information to the
host after transferring PIOSU.
* For information about the format of the attribute value information, see
Table 5.11.
X’D1’
X’D2’
SMART READ ATTRIBUTE THRESHOLDS:
This subcommand is used to transfer 512-byte guarantee failure threshold
value data to the host.
* For information about the format of the guarantee failure threshold value
data, see Table 5.12.
SMART ENABLE/DISABLE ATTRIBUTE AUTOSAVE:
Enables (by setting the Sector Count field to a value other than 00h) or disables
(by setting the Sector Count field to 00h) a function that automatically saves
device attribute values (“automatic attribute save function”). This setting is
held regardless of whether the device is turned on or off. If the automatic
attribute save function is enabled and more than 15 minutes has elapsed since
the last time that attributes were saved, then the attributes are saved.
However, if the automatic attribute save function is disabled, the attributes
are not saved. Upon receiving this subcommand, a device enables or
disables the automatic attribute save function, and transfers the RegDH, then
reports the status.
In this drive, this function is enabled at the shipment from the factory.
SMART SAVE ATTRIBUTE VALUES:
X’D3’
X’D4’
When the device receives this subcommand, if saves device attribute value
data, and transfers the RegDH, then reports the status.
SMART EXECUTIVE OFF-LINE IMMEDIATE:
A device which receives this command starts collecting the off-line data
specified in the Sector Number field, or stops.
In the off-line mode, after transferring the RegDH, off-line data are
collected. In the captive mode, it collects off-line data then transfers the
RegDH when collection of data is completed.
SN Off-line data collection mode
00h: Off-line diagnosis (off-line mode)
01h: Simple self-test (off-line mode)
02h: Comprehensive self-test (off-line mode)
03h: Conveyance self-test (off-line mode)
04h: Selective self-test (off-line mode)
7Fh: Self-test stop
81h: Simple self-test (captive mode)
82h: Comprehensive self-test (captive mode)
83h: Conveyance self-test (captive mode)
84h: Selective self-test (captive mode)
5-56
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
Table 5.10 Features Field values (subcommands) and functions (2/3)
Features Field
X’D5’
Function
SMART READ LOG:
A device which receives this sub-command reads the log sector specified in
the Sector Number Field. Next, it transfers the PIOSU and transmits the log
sector to the host computer.
SN:
SC:
Log sector
00h:
01h:
02h:
06h:
09h:
01h:
01h:
33h:
01h:
01h:
SMART log directory
SMART summary error log
SMART comprehensive error log
SMART self-test log
SMART selective self-test log
80h-9Fh: 01h-10h: Host vendor log
E0h:
E1h:
01h:
SCT Status Request
SCT Read Data
* See Table 5.19 concerning the SMART error log data format.
See Table 5.21 concerning the SMART self-test log data format.
See Table 5.22 concerning the SMART selective self-test log data
format.
See Table 5.25 concerning the SCT Status Request data format.
X’D6’
SMART WRITE LOG:
A device which receives this sub-command, when it has prepared to receive
data from the host computer, it transfers the PIOSU. Next, it receives data
from the host computer and writes the specified log sector in the Sector
Number Field.
SN:
SC:
Log sector
09h:
01h:
SMART selective self-test log
80h-9Fh: 01h-10h Host vendor log
E0h:
E1h:
01h:
SCT Command Set
SCT Read Data
* The host can write any desired data in the host vendor log.
See Table 5.28 to 5.30 concerning the SCT Command Set data format.
X’D8’
SMART ENABLE OPERATIONS:
This subcommand enables SMART. The setting is maintained even when
the device is turned off and then on.
When the device receives this subcommand, it enables SMART, then
transfers the RegDH.
C141-E249
5-57
Interface
Table 5.10 Features Field values (subcommands) and functions (3/3)
X’D9’
SMART DISABLE OPERATIONS:
This subcommand disables SMART. The setting is maintained even when
the device is turned off and then on.
When the device receives this subcommand, it disables SMART, then
transfers the RegDH.
X’DA’
SMART RETURN STATUS:
When the device receives this subcommand, it saves the current device attribute
values. Then the device compares the device attribute values with guarantee
failure threshold values. If there is an attribute value exceeding the threshold,
F4h and 2Ch are loaded into the Cylinder Low and Cylinder High field. If there
are no attribute values exceeding the thresholds, 4Fh and C2h are loaded into
the Cylinder Low and Cylinder High field. After the settings for the Cylinder
Low and Cylinder High field have been determined, the device transfers the
RegDH.
X’DB’
SMART ENABLE/DISABLE AUTO OFF-LINE:
This sets automatic off-line data collection in the enabled (when the Sector
Count field specification ≠ 00h) or disabled (when the Sector Count field
specification = 00) state. This setting is preserved whether the drive’s power
is switched on or off.
If 24 hours have passed since the power was switched on, or since the last
time that off-line data were collected, off-line data collection is performed
without relation to any command from the host computer.
The host must regularly issue the SMART READ DATA subcommand (Features
field = D0h), SMART SAVE ATTRIBUTE VALUES subcommand (Features
field = D3h), or SMART RETURN STATUS subcommand (Features field = DAh)
to save the device attribute value data on a medium.
Alternative, the device must issue the SMART ENABLE-DISABLE ATTRIBUTE
AUTOSAVE subcommand (Features field = D2h) to use a feature which regularly
save the device attribute value data to a medium.
In this drive, this function is enabled at the shipment from the factory.
The host can predict failures in the device by periodically issuing the SMART
RETURN STATUS subcommand (Features field = DAh) to reference the Cylinder
Low and Cylinder High field.
If an attribute value is below the guarantee failure threshold value, the device is
about to fail or the device is nearing the end of its life. In this case, the host
recommends that the user quickly backs up the data.
5-58
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
0
x
1
x
1
x
0
0
0
0
xx
Key (C2h)
Key (4Fh)
xx
xx
Subcommand
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
Key-failure prediction status (C2h/2Ch)
Key-failure prediction status (4Fh/F4h)
xx
xx
Error information
The attribute value information is 512-byte data; the format of this data is shown
the following Table 5.11. The host can access this data using the SMART READ
DATE subcommand (Features field = D0h). The guarantee failure threshold value
data is 512-byte data; the format of this data is shown the following Table 5.12.
The host can access this data using the SMART READ ATTRIBUTE
THRESHOLDS subcommand (Features field = D1h).
C141-E249
5-59
Interface
Table 5.11 Format of device attribute value data
Byte
Item
00
01
Data format version number
02
Attribute 1
Attribute ID
Status flag
03
04
05
06
Current attribute value
Attribute value for worst case so far
Raw attribute value
07 to 0C
0D
Reserved
0E to 169 Attribute 2 to
attribute 30
(The format of each attribute value is the same as
that of bytes 02 to 0D.)
16A
16B
Off-line data collection status
Self-test execution status
16C, 16D Off-line data collection execution time [sec.]
16E
16F
Reserved
Off-line data collection capability
Trouble prediction capability flag
Error logging capability
170, 171
172
173
(Self-test error detection point)
174
Simple self-test (Quick Test) execution time [min.]
Comprehensive self-test (Comprehensive Test) execution time [min.]
Conveyance self-test execution time [min.]
175
176
177 to 181 Reserved
182 to 1FE Vendor unique
1FF
Table 5.12 Format of guarantee failure threshold value data
Byte Item
Check sum
00
01
Data format version number
02
03
Threshold 1 Attribute ID
Guarantee failure threshold
Reserved
04 to 0D
0E to 169 Threshold 2 to (The format of each threshold value is the same as
Threshold 30 that of bytes 02 to 0D.)
16A to 17B Reserved
17C to 1FE Vendor unique
1FF Check sum
5-60
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
•
•
Data format version number
The data format version number indicates the version number of the data format of
the device attribute values or guarantee failure thresholds. The data format
version numbers of the device attribute values and guarantee failure thresholds are
the same. When a data format is changed, the data format version numbers are
updated.
Attribute ID
The attribute ID is defined as follows:
Attribute ID
Attribute name
(Indicates unused attribute data.)
Read Error Rate
0
1
2
Throughput Performance
Spin Up Time
3
4
Start/Stop Count
5
Reallocated Sector Count
Seek Error Rate
7
8
Seek Time Performance
Power-On Hours Count
Spin Retry Count
9
10
12
Drive Power Cycle Count
Emergency Retract Cycle Count
Load/Unload Cycle Count
HDA Temperature
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
(199)
200
203
240
ECC On the Fly Count
Reallocated Event Count
Current Pending Sector Count
Off-Line Scan Uncorrectable Sector Count
(Ultra ATA CRC Error Count)
Write Error Rate
Run Out
Transfer Error Rate
* If the device receives the reset during
transferring the data, the transfer error is
counted up.
C141-E249
5-61
Interface
•
Status Flag
Bit
0
Meaning
If this bit is 1, it indicates normal operations are assured with the
attribute when the attribute value exceeds the threshold value.
1
If this bit is 1 (0), it indicates the attribute only updated by an on-
line test (off-line test).
2
3
4
If this bit 1, it indicates the attribute that represents performance.
If this bit 1, it indicates the attribute that represents an error rate.
If this bit 1, it indicates the attribute that represents the number of
occurrences.
5
If this bit 1, it indicates the attribute that can be collected/saved
even if SMART is disabled.
6 to 15
Reserve bit
•
•
Current attribute value
It indicates the normalized value of the original attribute value. The value deviates
in a range of 01h to 64h (range of 01h to C8h for the Ultra ATA CRC error rate
and communication error rate). It indicates that the closer the value is to 01h, the
higher the possibility of a failure. The host compares the attribute value with the
threshold value. If the attribute value is larger than the threshold value, the drive
is determined to be normal.
Attribute value for the worst case so far
This is the worst attribute value among the attribute values collected to date. This
value indicates the state nearest to a failure so far.
•
•
Raw attribute value
Raw attributes data is retained.
Off-line data collection status
5-62
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
Table 5.13 Off-line data collection status
Status Byte
Meaning
00h or 80h Off-line data collection is not executed.
02h or 82h Off-line data collection has ended without an error.
04h or 84h Off-line data collection is interrupted by a command from the host.
05h or 85h Off-line data collection has ended before completion because of a
command from the host.
06h or 86h Off-line data collection has ended before completion because of an
error that makes collection impossible. (Not used)
40 to 7Fh
Vendor unique (Not used)
C0h to FFh
01h or 81h
03h or 83h
07h or 3Fh
87h to BFh
Reserved
•
Self-test execution status
Table 5.14 Self-test execution status
Bit
0 to 3:
Meaning
Remainder of the self-test is indicated as a percentage in a range
of "0h to 9h" (corresponding to 0 to 90 %).
4 to 7:
= 0h:
Self-test execution status
Self-test has ended successfully, or self-test has not been
executed.
= 1h:
= 2h:
= 3h:
= 4h:
Self-test is suspended by the host.
Self-test is interrupted by a soft reset/COMRESET from the host.
Self-test cannot be executed.
Self-test has ended with an abnormality because of unknown
contents.
= 5h:
= 6h:
= 7h:
Self-test has ended with "Write/Read Test" error.
Self-test has ended with "Servo Check," error.
Self-test has ended with "SMART Drive Error Log Check,"
"Random Read Test," "Adjacent G-List Test, " or "Read Scan
Test" error.
= 8h:
Self-test has ended with "Pre-SMART Check," or "Post-SMART
Check" error.
= 9h to Eh: Reserved
= Fh: Self-test is in progress.
C141-E249
5-63
Interface
•
Off-line data collection capability
Indicates the method of off-line data collection carried out by the drive. If the off-
line data collection capability is 0, it indicates that off-line data collection is not
supported.
Table 5.15 Off-line data collection capability
Bit
0
Meaning
If this bit is 1, it indicates that the SMART EXECUTE OFF-
LINE IMMEDATE sub-command (Features field = D4h) is
supported.
1
2
Vendor unique
If this bit is 1, it indicates that offline data collection under
execution is aborted when a new command is received.
3
4
5
6
7
If this bit is 1, it indicates that the SMART Off-line Read
Scanning Technology is supported.
If this bit is 1, it indicates that the SMART Self-test function
is supported.
If this bit is 1, it indicates that the SMART Conveyance Self-
test is supported.
If this bit is 1, it indicates that the SMART Selective Self-test
is supported.
Reserved bits
•
Failure prediction capability flag
Table 5.16 Failure prediction capability flag
Bit
0
Meaning
If this bit is 1, it indicates that the attribute value is saved on
media before the drive enters the power save mode.
1
If this bit is 1, it indicates that the attribute value is saved
automatically after the pre-set operation of the drive.
2 to 15
Reserved bits
•
Error logging capability
Table 5.17 Drive error logging capability
Bit
0
Meaning
If this bit is 1, it indicates that the drive error logging
function is supported.
1 to 7
Reserved bits
5-64
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
•
•
Checksum
Two’s complement of the lower byte, obtained by adding 511-byte data one byte
at a time from the beginning.
Guarantee failure threshold
The limit of a varying attribute value. The host compares the attribute values with
the thresholds to identify a failure.
Table 5.18 Log Directory Data Format
Byte
Item
00
01
SMART Logging Version
02
03
04
Number of sectors of Address "01h"
Reserved
Number of sectors of Address "02h"
05 to 0B
Reserved
0C
0D to 11
12
Number of sectors of Address "06h"
Reserved
Number of sectors of Address "09h"
Reserved
13 to FF
100
Number of sector
Address 80h
101
Reserved
Address 81h
to
Address 9Fh
"102" and "13F" are both the same
format as "100-101"
102 to 13F
140 to 1FF
Reserved
•
SMART error logging
If the device detects an unrecoverable error during execution of a command
received from the host, the device registers the error information in the SMART
Summary Error Log (see Table 5.19) and the SMART Comprehensive Error Log
(see Table 5.20), and saves the information on media.
The host issues the SMART Read Log Sector sub-command (Features field = D5h,
Sector Number field = 01h, Sector Count field = 01h) and can read the SMART
Summary Error Log.
The host issues the SMART Read Log Sector sub-command (Features field = D5h,
Sector Number field = 02h, Sector Count field = 33h) and can read the SMART
Comprehensive Error Log.
C141-E249
5-65
Interface
Table 5.19 Data format of SMART Summary Error Log (1/2)
Byte
Item
00
01
Version of this function
Pointer for the latest “Error Log Data Structure”
Forth last command data structure
Third last command data structure
Second last command data structure
Last command data structure
Device Control field value
02 to 0D
0E to 19
1A to 25
26 to 31
32
33
Features field value
34
Sector Count field value
35
Sector Number field value
Command data
structure
36
Cylinder Low field value
Cylinder High field value
Drive/Head field value
Command field value
37
38
39
Error log data
structure
Elapsed time after the power-on
sequence (unit: ms)
3A to 3D
3E
3F
Reserved
Error field value
40
Sector Count field value
Sector Number field value
Cylinder Low field value
Cylinder High field value
Drive/Head field value
Status field value
41
42
Error data structure
43
44
45
46 to 58
59
Vendor unique
State
5A, 5B
Power-on time (unit: h)
5-66
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
Table 5.19 Data format of SMART Summary Error Log (2/2)
Byte
Item
Error log data structure 2
to
5C to 1C3
Error log data structure 5
1C4, 1C5 Total number of drive errors
1C6 to 1FE Reserved
1FF
Check sum
•
Command data structure
Indicates the command received when an error occurs.
•
•
•
Error data structure
Indicates the status register when an error occurs.
Total number of drive errors
Indicates total number of errors registered in the error log.
Checksum
Two's complement of the lower byte, obtained by adding 511-byte data one byte at a
time from the beginning.
•
Status
Bits 0 to 3: Indicates the drive status when received error commands according
to the following table.
Bits 4 to 7: Vendor unique
Status
Meaning
0
Unclear status
Sleep status
1
2
3
Standby status
Active status (BSY bit = 0)
Off-line data collection being executed
Reserved
4
5 to F
C141-E249
5-67
Interface
Table 5.20 Data format of SMART Comprehensive Error Log
Byte
First sector
Next sector
00
SMART Error Logging 01h
Reserved
Reserved
01
Index Pointer Latest Error Data Structure
st
02…5B
Error Log Data Structure 5n+1
Error Log Data Structure 5n+2
Error Log Data Structure 5n+3
Error Log Data Structure 5n+4
Error Log Data Structure 5n+5
1 Error Log Data Structure
nd
5C…B5
2
Error Log Data Structure2
rd
B6…10F
110…169
16A…1C3
3 Error Log Data Structure3
th
4 Error Log Data Structure4
th
5 Error Log Data Structure5
1C4…1C5
1C6…1FE
1FF
Total number of drive errors
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Check sum
Check sum
“n” indicates sector number in the Error Log. The first sector is 0.
•
SMART Self-Test
The host computer can issue the SMART Execute Off-line Immediate sub-command
(Features field = D4h) and cause the device to execute a self-test. When the self-test
is completed, the device saves the SMART self-test log to the disk medium.
The host computer can issue the SMART Read Log Sector sub-command
(Features field = D5h, Sector Number field = 06h, Sector Count field = 01h) and
can read the SMART self-test log.
5-68
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
Table 5.21 SMART self-test log data format
Byte
00, 01
02
Item
Self-test log data structure
Self-test log 1
Self-test number (Sector Number field Value)
Self-test execution status
03
04, 05
06
Life time. Total power-on time [hours]
Self-test error No.
07 to 0A
0B to 19
Error LBA
Vendor unique
(Each log data format is the same as that in
byte 02 to 19.)
1A to 1F9 Self-test log 2 to 21
1FA, 1FB Vendor unique
1FC
Self-test index
1FD, 1FE Reserved
1FF
Check sum
•
•
•
•
Self-test number
Indicates the type of self-test executed.
Self-test execution status
Same as byte 16Bh of the attribute value.
Self-test index
If this is "00h", it indicates the status where the self-test has never been executed.
Checksum
Two's complement of the lower byte, obtained by adding 511-byte data one byte at a
time from the beginning.
C141-E249
5-69
Interface
Table 5.22 Selective self-test log data structure
Byte
Item
00h, 01h
02h...09h
0Ah...11h
12h...19h
1Ah...21h
22h...29h
2Ah...31h
32h...39h
3Ah...41h
42h...49h
4Ah...51h
52h...151h
152h...1EBh
1Ech...1F3h
1F4h...1F5h
1F6h...1F7h
1F8h
Data Structure Revision Number
Starting LBA
Test Span 1
Ending LBA
Starting LBA
Test Span 2
Ending LBA
Starting LBA
Test Span 3
Ending LBA
Starting LBA
Test Span 4
Ending LBA
Starting LBA
Test Span 5
Ending LBA
Reserved
Vender Unique
Current LBA under test
Current Span under test
Feature Flags
Offline Execution Flag
Vender Unique
1F9h
Selective Offline Scan Number
Reserved
1FAh, 1FBh
1FCh, 1FDh
1FEh, 1FFh
Selective Self-test pending time [min]
Checksum
•
Test Span
Selective self-test log provides for the definition of up to five test spans. If the
starting and ending LBA values for a test span are both zero, a test span is not
defined and not tested.
•
Current LBA under test
As the self-test progress, the device shall modify this value to contain the LBA
currently being tested.
5-70
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
•
•
Current Span under test
As the self-test progress, the device shall modify this value to contain the test span
number currently being tested.
Feature Flags
Table 5.23 Selective self-test feature flags
Bit
Description
0
Vendor specific (unused)
1
When set to one, perform off-line scan after selective test
Vendor specific (unused)
2
3
When set to one, off-line scan after selective test is pending.
When set to one, off-line scan after selective test is active.
Reserved
4
5...15
Bit [l] shall be written by the host and returned unmodified by the device. Bit [3:4]
shall be written as zeros by the host and the device shall modify them as the test
progress.
•
Selective Self-test pending time [min]
The selective self-test pending time is the time in minutes from power-on to the
resumption of the off-line testing if the pending bit is set.
C141-E249
5-71
Interface
•
SMART Command Transport (SCT)
This command supports the following functions by using the SMART command
according to the value specified for the SN field and the FR field. Moreover,
WRITE LOG EXT/READ LOG EXT is used in 48-CMD environment.
Table 5.24 SCT command and the function
Sector Number
field
Features field
X ' D5 '
Function
SCT STATUS REQUEST:
X ' E0 '
A device that received this subcommand transfers Status
information of SCT in 512 bytes to the host.
* For information about the format of the SCT Status, see
Table 5.25.
X ' E0 '
X ' D6 '
SCT COMMAND SET:
A device that received this subcommand and the Key Sector
Format data of 512 bytes is received from the host, and a
device execute the specific operation for which the action
code.
* For information about the format of the Key Sector
Format, see Table 5.28 to Table 5.31.
X ' E1 '
X ' D5 '
SCT READ DATA:
A device that received this subcommand transfers the data
table of the number of sectors specified with Sector Count
field to the host. It is necessary to issue the SCT
COMMAND SET immediately before when this command is
issued.
X ' E1 '
X ' D6 '
SCT WRITE DATA:
A device that received this subcommand and the Data Table
of the number of sectors specified with Sector Count field
from the host, and a device execute the write operation. It is
necessary to issue the SCT COMMAND SET immediately
before when this command is issued.
5-72
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
•
SCT STATUS REQUEST (SN = E0h, FR = D5h)
This command is used to know the status data of SCT shown in Table 5.25 of the
device.
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
0
x
1
x
1
0
0
0
0
DV
Xx
Key (C2h)
Key (4Fh)
E0h
01h
D5h
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
DV
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
C141-E249
5-73
Interface
Table 5.25 Format of SCT STATUS Response (1/2)
BYTE
Contents
000h
001h
Format Version
002h
003h
004h
005h
SCT Version
SCT Spec
Status Flag
Bit31-1: Reserved
006h
007h
008h
009h
Bit0: Initialized flag (maintained Power-OFF/ON)
0 = When any user LBA is written, this bit is cleared.
This bit is also cleared if the capacity of the drive is changed via
SET MAX (EXT), DCO.
1= A WRITE SAME command to all logical blocks has completed
without error.
Drive State
00h = Active
01h = not support (Standby)
02h = not support (Sleep)
00Ah
03h = DST executing in background.
04h = SMART Off-line Data collection executing in background.
05h = SCT command executing in background.
06h-FFh = Reserved
00Bh
to
Reserved
00Dh
Extended Status Code
00Eh
00Fh
Status of last SCT command issued.
* (See Table 5.26)
010h
011h
012h
013h
Action Code
Action code of last SCT command issued.
Function Code
Function code of last SCT command issued.
5-74
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
Table 5.25 Format of SCT STATUS Response (2/2)
Contents
BYTE
014h
to
Reserved
027h
028h
to
02Fh
Current LBA of SCT command executing in background.
Reserved
030h
to
0C7h
HDA Temp [°C]
0C8h
0C9h
0CAh
0CBh
0CCh
Current drive HDA temperature.
Reserved
Max Temp [°C]
Maximum HDA temperature this power cycle.
Reserved
Life Max Temp [°C]
Maximum HDA temperature the life of the device.
0CDh
to
Reserved
1DFh
1E0h
to
Vender specific.
1FFh
C141-E249
5-75
Interface
Table 5.26 SCT STATUS code
Code
Definition
0000h
0001h
0002h
0003h
0004h
0005h
0006h
0007h
Command complete without error.
Invalid Function Code.
Input LBA out of range.
Request sector count over flow.
Invalid Function Code in Error Recovery Control command.
Invalid Selection Code in Error Recovery Control command.
Host read command timer is less than minimum value.
Host write command timer is less than minimum value.
Background SCT command was aborted because of an interrupting
host command.
0008h
Background SCT command was terminated because of
unrecoverable error.
0009h
000Ah
000Bh
Invalid function code in LONG SECTOR ACCESS command.
SCT data transfer command was issued without first issuing an SCT
command.
000Ch
000Dh
000Eh
Invalid function code in Feature Control command.
Invalid Feature Code in Feature Control command.
Invalid New State in Feature Control command.
000Fh
0010h
Invalid Option Flag in Feature Control command.
Invalid Action Code.
0011h
0012h
0013h
Invalid Table ID.
Command was aborted due to drive security being locked.
Invalid revision code.
Foreground SCT operation was terminated because of
unrecoverable error.
0014h
0015h
to
Reserved
BFFFh
C000h
to
Vender specific.
FFFEh
5-76
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
•
SCT COMMAND SET (SN = E0h, FR = D6)
This command transfers Key Sector Format in 512 bytes including the action code
shown in Table 5.27 to the device, and executes each function to show in Table
5.28 to Table 5.31.
28-bit command
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
0
x
1
x
1
0
0
0
0
DV
Xx
Key (C2h)
Key (4Fh)
E0h
01h
D6h
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
DV
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
C141-E249
5-77
Interface
Table 5.27 Action code
Code
Function
Data transfer
0000h
0001h
Reserved
-
-
Not supported
WRITE SAME
See Table 5.28.
0002h
0003h
0004h
Write
ERROR RECOVERY CONTROL
See Table 5.29.
-
-
FEATURE CONTROL
See Table 5.30.
SCT DATA TABLE
See Table 5.31.
0005h
Read
-
0006h
to
Reserved
BFFFh
C000h
to
Vender Specific
-
FFFFh
Table 5.28 WRITE SAME (1/2)
Byte
Name
Value
0002h
Description
000h
001h
Action Code
WRITE SAME
Repeat Write Pattern
0001h
0002h
It initializes it by data pattern of 32bit specified with
byte 014h-017h.
Repeat Write data block
002h
003h
Function Code
It initializes it by data pattern of 1sct transfer by the
SCT Write data.
0101h
0102h
Repeat Write Pattern Foreground
Repeat Write data block Foreground
004h
to
LBA
(8 byte) Start LBA
00Bh
5-78
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
Table 5.28 WRITE SAME (2/2)
Byte
Name
Count
Value
Description
00Ch
to
(8 byte) Number of Sectors
013h
014h
to
017h
If the Function Code is 0001h, this field contains a 32-
bit pattern that is written on the media.
Pattern
(4 byte)
-
018h
to
(Reserved)
Reserved
1FFh
* It is invalid excluding the description value.
Table 5.29 ERROR RECOVERY CONTROL
Byte
Name
Value
0003h
Description
000h
001h
Action Code
ERROR RECOVERY CONTROL
Set New Value
0001h
0002h
The retry processing when making an error in the
specified timer
002h
003h
Function Code
Return Current Value
The timer value of the error recovery being set now is
displayed in SN /SC field.
004h
005h
0001h
0002h
Read Timer
Selection Code
Value
Write Timer
Set to Timer Value (x 100 ms)
Minimum value is 10 sec.
006h
007h
(ex.) 0000h: Disable timeout
(2 byte)
0063h: Invalid
0064h: 10000 ms (10 s)
008h
to
(Reserved)
-
Reserved
1FFh
* It is invalid excluding the description value.
C141-E249
5-79
Interface
Table 5.30 FEATURE CONTROL COMMAND
Byte
Name
Value
0004h
Description
000h
001h
Action Code
FEATURE CONTROL COMMAND
0001h
0002h
Set New State
Return Current State
002h
003h
Function Code
Feature Code
Current Feature Control State is displayed in SN/SC
field.
Return Option Flag
0003h
Current Option Flag is displayed in SN/SC field.
Write Cache
0001h
0002h
0003h
004h
005h
Write Reordering
Set time interval for temperature logging
Feature Code = 0001h (Set Write Cache)
0001h: Allow write cache operation to be determined
by ATA Set Feature command.
0002h: Force Write Cache enabled.
0003h: Force Write Cache disable.
Feature Code = 0002h(Set Write Reordering)
0001h: Enable Write Reordering
0002h: Disable Write Reordering
Feature Code = 0003h(Set time interval)
0000h: Invalid
006h
007h
New State
(2 byte)
0001h-FFFFh: Logging interval in minutes
(ex.) 0001h: Temperature data collection
interval is 1min.
000Fh: Temperature data collection
interval is 15min.
Bit 15-1: Reserved
Bit0: 1 = Maintain the state at COMRESET/Power
cycle.
008h
009h
Option Flag
(Reserved)
(2 byte)
0 = Revert to default setting at
COMRESET/Power cycle.
00Ah
to
-
Reserved
1FFh
5-80
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
Table 5.31 SCT DATA TABLE
Byte
Name
Value
0005h
Description
000h
001h
Action Code
SCT DATA TABLE
Read Data Table
002h
003h
Function Code
0001h
0000h
0001h
Invalid
Reserved
HAD Temperature History Table.
* See Table 5.32.
0002h
004h
005h
0003h
to
CFFFh
Table ID
Reserved
D000h
to
FFFFh
Vender Specific
Reserved
006h
to
(Reserved)
-
1FFh
C141-E249
5-81
Interface
Table 5.32 HAD Temperature
Byte
Contents
000h
001h
Format Version
002h
003h
004h
005h
Sampling Period
Frequency of sampling each set time of temperature log.
Interval
Time of temperature log of interval (min)
Max Operation Limit (°C)
006h
007h
008h
009h
Over Limit (°C)
Min Operation Limit (°C)
Under Limit (°C)
00Ah
to
Reserved
01Dh
01Eh
to
Number of logs that can be recorded in temperature log.
Index of temperature log.
01Fh
020h
021h
Temperature log (128 data)
Entry 80h temperature log at Power cycle and default value is 80h.
022h
to
0A1h
022h: Temp Log No.0
023h: Temp Log No.1
to
0A1h: Temp Log No.127
0A2h
1FFh
Reserved
5-82
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
•
SCT READ DATA (SN = E1h, FR = D5)
This command reads the data specified with SCT SET COMMAND and number
of sectors specified Sector Count field
28-bit command
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
0
x
1
x
1
0
0
0
0
DV
Xx
Key (C2h)
Key (4Fh)
E1h
xx
D5h
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
DV
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
SCT READ DATA Command issue procedure.
1. Issue the SCT set command of action code 0005h.
2. Issue the SCT READ DATA command and receive the HDA temperature data
from the device.
C141-E249
5-83
Interface
•
SCT WRITE DATA (SN = E1h, FR = D6)
This command writes the data of the number of sectors for which the data
specified with SCT SET COMMAND and number of sectors specified Sector
Count Field.
28-bit command
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
0
x
1
x
1
1
1
1
1
DV
Xx
Key (C2h)
Key (4Fh)
E1h
xx
D6h
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
DV
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
SCT WRITE DATA Command issue procedure.
1. Issue the SCT set command of action code 0002h and function code 0002h.
2. Issue the SCT write command and the write data is transmitted to the device.
5-84
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
(17) DEVICE CONFIGURATION (X'B1')
Individual Device Configuration Overlay feature sub commands are identified by
the value placed in the Features field. The following table shows these Features
field values. If this command sets with the reserved value of Features field, an
aborted command error is posted.
FR field
Command
C0h
C1h
C2h
C3h
DEVICE CONFIGURATION RESTORE
DEVICE CONFIGURATION FREEZE
DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY
DEVICE CONFIGURATION SET
00h-BFh, C4h-FFh Reserved
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
1
x
0
x
1
x
1
x
0
0
0
1
xx
CH
CL
SN
SC
xx
xx
xx
xx
FR
C0h/C1h/C2h/C3h
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
Status information
x
DH
x
x
x
xx
CH
CL
SN
SC
xx
xx
xx
xx
ER
Error information
C141-E249
5-85
Interface
•
DEVICE CONFIGURATION RESTORE (Features Field = C0h)
The DEVICE CONFIGURATION RESTORE command disables any setting
previously made by a DEVICE CONFIGURATION SET command and returns
the content of the IDENTIFY DEVICE command response to the original settings
as indicated by the data returned from the execution of a DEVICE
CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY command. After execution of this command, the
settings are kept regardless of the power-on or COMRESET execution.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) The device is in the Device Configuration Freeze Lock state
(ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(2) The command was received before the DEVICE CONFIGURATION SET
command was issued (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(3) The SET MAX ADDRESS (EXT) command (F9h, 37h) has been specified
with a value in the Host Protected Area (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(4) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
•
DEVICE CONFIGURATION FREEZE LOCK (Features Field = C1h)
The DEVICE CONFIGURATION FREEZE LOCK command prevents accidental
modification of the Device Configuration Overlay settings. After successful
execution of a DEVICE CONFIGURATION FREEZE LOCK command, all
DEVICE CONFIGURATION SET, DEVICE CONFIGURATION FREEZE
LOCK, DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY, and DEVICE
CONFIGURATION RESTORE commands are aborted by the device. The
DEVICE CONFIGURATION FREEZE LOCK condition is cleared by a power-
down, not cleared by a COMRESET or software reset.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) The device is in the Device Configuration Freeze Lock state
(ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(2) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
5-86
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
•
DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY (Features Field = C2h)
The DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY command returns information
shown in Table 5.33. The content of this data structure indicates the selectable
commands, modes, and feature sets that the device is capable of supporting. If a
DEVICE CONFIGURATION SET command has been issued reducing the
capabilities, the response to an IDENTIFY DEVICE command will reflect the
reduced set of capabilities, however, the DEVICE CONFIGURATION
IDENTIFY command will not be changed.
•
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) The device is in the Device Configuration Freeze Lock state
(ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(2) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
DEVICE CONFIGURATION SET (Features Field = C3h)
The DEVICE CONFIGURATION SET command allows to reduce the set of
optional commands, modes, or feature sets supported by a device as indicated by a
DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY command. The format of the overlay
transmitted by the device is described in Table 5.33. As a result to the limitation
of the function by the DEVICE CONFIGURATION SET command, is reflected in
IDENTIFY information. When the bits in these words are cleared, the device no
longer supports the indicated command, mode, or feature set. If a bit is set in the
overlay transmitted by the device that is not set in the overlay received from a
DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY command, no action is taken for that
bit. After execution of this command, the settings are kept regardless of the
power-on, COMRESET, or soft reset.
If the restriction of Multiword DMA modes or Ultra DMA modes is executed, a SET
FEATURES command should be issued for the modes restriction prior the DEVICE
CONFIGURATION SET command is issued. When the Automatic Acoustic
Management function is assumed to be unsupported, Automatic Acoustic
Management is disabled beforehand by SET FEATURES command (FR=C2h).
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) The device is in the Device Configuration Freeze Lock state
(ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(2) The SET MAX ADDRESS (EXT) command (F9h, 37h) has been specified
with a value in the Host Protected Area (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(3) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
(4) A DEVICE CONFIGURATION SET command has already modified the
original settings as reported by a DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY
command1 (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(5) Any of the bit modification restrictions described are violated
(ST=51h,ER=04h).
C141-E249
5-87
Interface
Table 5.33 DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY data structure (1/2)
Word
Value
Content
0
1
X'0002'
X'0007'
Data structure revision
Multiword DMA modes supported
Reflected in IDENTIFY information "WORD63".
Bits 15-3: Reserved
Bit 2:
Bit 1:
Bit 0:
1 = Multiword DMA mode 2 and below are supported
1 = Multiword DMA mode 1 and below are supported
1 = Multiword DMA mode 0 is supported
2
X'003F'
Ultra DMA modes supported
Reflected in IDENTIFY information "WORD88".
Bits 15-7: Reserved
Bit 6:
Bit 5:
Bit 4:
Bit 3:
Bit 2:
Bit 1:
Bit 0:
1 = Ultra DMA mode 6 and below are supported
1 = Ultra DMA mode 5 and below are supported
1 = Ultra DMA mode 4 and below are supported
1 = Ultra DMA mode 3 and below are supported
1 = Ultra DMA mode 2 and below are supported
1 = Ultra DMA mode 1 and below are supported
1 = Ultra DMA mode 0 is supported
3 to 6
7
-
Maximum LBA address Reflected in IDENTIFY information
"WORD60-61". (WORD100-103) *
X'79CF'
*
Command set/feature set supported
Reflected in IDENTIFY information "WORD82-87".
Bit 15:
Bit 14:
Bit 13:
Bit 12:
Bit 11:
Reserved
1 = Write Read Verify feature supported
1 = SMART Conveyance self-test supported
1 = SMART Selective self-test supported
1 = FUA (Forced Unit Access) supported
Bit 10: Reserved
Bit 9:
Bit 8:
Bit 7:
Bit 6:
Bit 5:
Bit 4:
Bit 3:
Bit 2:
Bit 1:
Bit 0:
1 = Streaming feature set supported
1 = 48-bit Addressing feature set supported
1 = Host Protected Area feature set supported
1 = Automatic acoustic management supported
1 = READ/WRITE DMA QUEUED commands supported
1 = Power-up in Standby feature set supported
1 = Security feature set supported
1 = SMART error log supported
1 = SMART self-test supported
1 = SMART feature set supported
5-88
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
Table 5.33 DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY data structure (2/2)
Word
8
Value
Content
Serial-ATA command set/function
X'0015'
→ Reflected in IDENTIFY information ”Word 76 to 79.
Bits 15-5: Reserved
Bit 4:
Bit 3:
Bit 2:
Bit 1:
Bit 0:
1 = Software Settings Preservation supported
1 = Asynchronous Notification supported
1 = Interface power management supported
1 = Non-zero buffer offsets in DMA Setup FIS supported
1 = Native command queuing supported
9
10 to 20
21
X'0000'
X'0000'
X'2000'
Reserved for Serial-ATA
Reserved
Bits 15-14: Reserved
Bit 13:
Write uncorrectable is allowed
Reserved
Bit 12-0:
Reserved
22 to 254
255
X'0000'
X'xxA5'
Bits 15-8: Check sum code (This is obtained by calculating the sum of
all upper bytes and lower bytes in WORD 0 to 256 and the
byte consisting of bits 7 to 0 in WORD 255, and then
calculating the two's complement of the lowest byte of that
sum.)
Bits 7-0:
C141-E249
5-89
Interface
(18) READ MULTIPLE (X’C4’)
The READ MULTIPLE command performs the same tasks as the READ
SECTOR(S) command except that this command sends the PIO Setup FIS before
sending data blocks of multiple sectors. The PIO Setup FIS is sent only before the
first data block is transferred, and it is not sent before any subsequent transfer of
sector blocks.
The number of sectors per block is defined by a successful SET MULTIPLE
MODE Command. The SET MULTIPLE MODE command should be executed
prior to the READ MULTIPLE command.
If the number of requested sectors is not divided evenly (having the same number
of sectors [block count]), as many full blocks as possible are transferred, then a
final partial block is transferred. The number of sectors in the partial block to be
transferred is n where n = remainder of (“number of sectors”/”block count”).
If the READ MULTIPLE command is issued when the READ MULTIPLE
command is disabled, the device rejects the READ MULTIPLE command with an
ABORTED COMMAND error.
If an uncorrectable disk read error occurs, the read operation stops at the sector
where the error occurred (even if the read operation has not reached the end of the
block). At this time, the number of sectors that have not been transferred
(including the error sector), and either the cylinder, head, and sector addresses of
the error sector (CHS mode) or the logical block address of the error sector (LBA
mode) are set in the Shadow Block Register.
Figure 5.12 shows an example of the execution of the READ MULTIPLE
command.
•
Block count specified by SET MULTIPLE MODE command = 4 (number of
sectors in a block)
•
READ MULTIPLE command specifies;
Number of requested sectors = 9 (Sector Count register = 9)
5-90
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
Reg. HD
Host
Device
PIO Setup
Data
Block
Block
(4 sectors)
PIO Setup
Data
(4 sectors)
PIO Setup
Data (1sector)
Partial
Block
Figure 5.12 Execution example of READ MULTIPLE command
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A specified address exceeds the range where read operations are allowed
(ST = 51h, ER = 10h).
(2) The range where read operations are allowed will be exceeded by an address
during a read operation (ST = 51h, ER = 10h).
(3) An uncorrectable disk read error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 40h).
(4) The sync byte indicating the beginning of a sector was not found
(ST = 51h, ER = 01h).
(5) The READ MULTIPLE command is disabled (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(6) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 0Ch).
(7) An error other than the above errors occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
C141-E249
5-91
Interface
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
1
0
x
0
x
0
1
0
0
L
HD No. / LBA
Start cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA
Start cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA
Start sector No.
Transfer sector count
xx
/ LBA [LSB]
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
HD No. / LBA
x
L
x
x
End cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA
End cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA
End sector No.
/ LBA [LSB]
(*1)
Error information
*1 If the command is completed normally, the number of remaining
sectors is set in this field.
If the command is terminated because of an error, the number of
sectors for which data has not been transferred is set in the field.
5-92
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
(19) WRITE MULTIPLE (X’C5’)
The WRITE MULTIPLE command performs the same tasks as the WRITE
SECTOR(S) command except that this command sends the PIO Setup FIS before
sending data blocks of multiple sectors. The PIO Setup FIS is sent only before the
first data block is transferred, and it is not sent before any subsequent transfer of
sector blocks
.
The number of sectors per block is defined by a successful SET MULTIPLE
MODE command. The SET MULTIPLE MODE command should be executed
prior to the WRITE MULTIPLE command.
If the number of requested sectors is not divided evenly (having the same number
of sectors [block count]), as many full blocks as possible are transferred, then a
final partial block is transferred. The number of sectors in the partial block to be
transferred is n where n = remainder of (“number of sectors”/”block count”).
If the WRITE MULTIPLE command is issued before the SET MULTIPLE
MODE command is executed or when WRITE MULTIPLE command is disabled,
the device rejects the WRITE MULTIPLE command with an ABORTED
COMMAND error.
A disk write error that occurs during execution of the WRITE MULTIPLE
command will be reported after a disk write operation has been attempted for the
transferred blocks and partial block. The write operation stops at the sector where
the error occurred (even if the write operation has not reached the end of the
block). At this time, the number of remaining sectors (the error sector and
subsequent sectors) and either cylinder, head, and sector addresses of the error
sector (CHS mode) or the logical block address of the error sector (LBA mode) are
set in the Shadow Block Register.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A specified address exceeds the range where write operations are allowed
(after a transfer of dummy data, ST = 51h, ER = 10h).
(2) The range where write operations are allowed will be exceeded by an address
during a write operation (after a transfer of dummy data, ST = 51h, ER = 10h).
(3) A write fault was detected when the write cache was disabled
(ST = 71h, ER = 10h).
(4) While the write cache is enabled, if the status indicating a completed transfer
(STS = 50h) is returned and a data write operation failed because a write fault
was detected during the data write operation, Abort will be returned for all
subsequent ATA commands (ST = 71h, ER = 04h). This state is cleared the
next time that the device is turned on.
(5) The WRITE MULTIPLE command is disabled (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(6) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
(7) An error other than the above errors occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
C141-E249
5-93
Interface
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
1
x
1
0
x
0
x
0
1
0
1
L
HD No. / LBA
CH
Start cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA
Start cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA
CL
SN
Start sector No.
Transfer sector count
xx
/ LBA [LSB]
SC
FR
(R: Retry)
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
HD No. / LBA
x
L
x
x
Start cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA
Start cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA
Start sector No.
/ LBA [LSB]
00 (*1)
Error information
*1 If the command was terminated because of an error, the number of
sectors for which data has not been written is set in this field.
5-94
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
(20) SET MULTIPLE MODE (X’C6’)
This command enables the device to perform the READ MULTIPLE and
WRITE MULTIPLE commands. The block count (number of sectors in a
block) for these commands are also specified by the SET MULTIPLE MODE
command.
The number of sectors per block is written into the Sector Count field. The IDD
supports block sizes of 1, 2, 4, 8, and 16 sectors.
Upon receipt of this command, the device checks the contents of the Sector Count
field. If the contents of the Sector Count field is valid and is a supported block
count, the value is stored for all subsequent READ MULTIPLE and WRITE
MULTIPLE commands. Execution of these commands is then enabled. If the
value of the Sector Count register is not a supported block count, an ABORTED
COMMAND error is posted and the READ MULTIPLE and WRITE MULTIPLE
commands are disabled.
If the contents of the Sector Count field is 0, when the SET MULTIPLE MODE
command is issued, the READ MULTIPLE and WRITE MULTIPLE commands
are disabled.
When the SET MULTIPLE MODE command operation is completed, the device
reports the status to the host.
In the default mode that is entered at power-on, the READ MULTIPLE and
WRITE MULTIPLE commands are enabled (block count = 10h).
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A value other than 00h, 01h, 02h, 04h, 08h, or 10h is specified in the SC field
(ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(2) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
1
x
0
x
0
x
0
1
1
0
xx
xx
xx
xx
Sector count/block
xx
C141-E249
5-95
Interface
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
Sector count/block
Error information
5-96
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
(21) READ DMA (X’C8’ or X’C9’)
The READ DMA command reads data from sectors, starting from the sectors
specified in the Device/Head, Cylinder High, Cylinder Low, and Sector Number
fields and continuing for as many sectors as specified in the Sector Count field. A
value ranging from 1 to 256 can be specified for the number of sectors. In order to
specify 256, "00" must be set in the Sector Count field. For the protocol
concerning data transfers, see Section 5.4.4.
When the command is completed, either cylinder, head, and sector addresses
(CHS mode) or the logical block address (LBA mode) of the last sector is stored in
the Shadow Block Register.
If an error such as an uncorrectable disk read error is detected during execution of
the READ DMA command and continued operation not possible, the data transfer
stops after all data, including the data of the sector where the error was detected, is
transferred. The device notifies the host of the status by sending the RegDH FIS.
At this time, the number of remaining sectors including the sector where the error
was detected, and either cylinder, head, and sector addresses (CHS mode) or the
logical block address (LBA mode) of the sector where the error was detected are
stored in the Shadow Block Register.
The host system can select the DMA transfer mode by using the SET FEATURES
command, however, the transfer speed does not change.
•
•
Multiword DMA transfer mode 0 to 2
Ultra DMA transfer mode 0 to 5
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A specified address exceeds the range where read operations are allowed
(ST = 51h, ER = 10h).
(2) The range where read operations are allowed will be exceeded by an address
during a read operation (ST = 51h, ER = 10h).
(3) An uncorrectable disk read error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 40h).
(4) The sync byte indicating the beginning of a sector was not found
(ST = 51h, ER = 01h).
(5) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 0Ch).
(6) A Host Buffer CRC error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 84h).
(7) An error other than the above errors occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
C141-E249
5-97
Interface
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
1
0
x
0
x
1
0
0
R
L
HD No. / LBA
Start cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA
Start cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA
Start sector No.
Transfer sector count
xx
/ LBA [LSB]
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
HD No. / LBA
x
L
x
x
Start cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA
Start cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA
Start sector No.
00 (*1)
Error information
/ LBA [LSB]
*1 If the command is terminated due to an error, the remaining
number of sectors of which data was not transferred is set in this
register.
5-98
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
(22) WRITE DMA (X’CA’ or X’CB’)
The WRITE DMA command writes data to sectors starting from the sectors
specified in the Device/Head, Cylinder High, Cylinder Low, and Sector Number
fields and continuing for as many sectors as specified in the Sector Count field. A
value ranging from 1 to 256 can be specified for the number of the sectors. In
order to specify 256, "00" must be set in the Sector Count field. For the protocol
concerning data transfers, see Section 5.4.5.
When the command is completed, cylinder, head, and sector addresses (CHS
mode) of the last sector to which data was written is stored in the Shadow Block
Register.
If a disk write error is detected during execution of the WRITE DMA command
and continued operation is not possible, command processing is terminated after
all data, including the data of the sector where the error was detected, is
transferred. The device notifies the host of the status by sending the RegDH FIS.
At this time, the number of remaining sectors including the sector where the error
was detected, and either cylinder, head, and sector addresses (CHS mode) or the
logical block address (LBA mode) of the sector where the error was detected are
stored in the Shadow Block Register.
A host system can select the following transfer mode using the SET FEATURES
command, however, the transfer speed does not change.
•
•
Multiword DMA transfer mode 0 to 2
Ultra DMA transfer mode 0 to 5
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A specified address exceeds the range where write operations are allowed
(after a transfer of dummy data, ST = 51h, ER = 10h).
(2) The range where write operations are allowed will be exceeded by an address
during a write operation (after a transfer of dummy data, ST = 51h, ER = 10h).
(3) A write fault was detected when the write cache was disabled
(ST = 71h, ER = 10h).
(4) While the write cache is enabled, if the status indicating a completed transfer
(STS = 50h) is returned and a data write operation failed because a write fault
was detected during the data write operation, Abort will be returned for all
subsequent ATA commands (ST = 71h, ER = 04h). This state is cleared the
next time that the device is turned on.
(5) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
(6) An error other than the above errors occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
C141-E249
5-99
Interface
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
1
0
x
0
x
1
0
1
R
L
HD No. / LBA
Start cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA
Start cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA
Start sector No.
Transfer sector count
xx
/ LBA [LSB]
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
HD No. / LBA
x
L
x
x
Start cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA
Start cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA
Start sector No.
00 (*1)
Error information
/ LBA [LSB]
*1 If the command was terminated because of an error, the number of
sectors for which data has not been written is set in this field.
5-100
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
(23) READ BUFFER (X’E4’)
The host system can read the current contents of the data buffer of the device by
issuing this command.
Upon receipt of this command, the device transfers the PIO Setup. After that, the
host system can read up to 512 bytes of data from the buffer.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 0Ch).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
1
x
1
x
0
x
0
1
0
0
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
Status information
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
C141-E249
5-101
Interface
(24) FLUSH CACHE (X’E7’)
This command is used to write every write cache data stored by the device into the
medium. When the device completes all the data writing, it reports the status to
the host system. The device performs every error recovery so that the data are
read correctly.
When executing this command, the writing of the data may take several seconds if
much data are to be written.
In case a non-recoverable disk write error has occurred while the data is being
read, the error generation address is put into the shadow block register before
ending the command. This error sector is deleted from the write cache data.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
1
x
1
x
0
x
0
1
1
1
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
5-102
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
(25) WRITE BUFFER (X’E8’)
The host system can overwrite the contents of the data buffer of the device with a
desired data pattern by issuing this command. Upon receipt of this command, the
device transfers the PIO Setup. After that, 512 bytes of data is transferred from
the host and the device writes the data to the buffer, then reports the status .
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
1
x
1
x
0
x
1
0
0
0
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
C141-E249
5-103
Interface
(26) IDENTIFY DEVICE (X’EC’)
The host system issues the IDENTIFY DEVICE command to read parameter
information from the device. When it receives the command, the device prepares
the parameter information to be sent to the host. Next, the device sends the PIO
Setup FIS to the host, then sends the parameter information including a 512-byte
date. Table 5.34 shows the values of the parameter words and the meaning in the
buffer.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 0Ch).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
1
x
1
x
0
x
1
1
0
0
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
5-104
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
(27) IDENTIFY DEVICE DMA (X’EE’)
When this command is not used to transfer data to the host in DMA mode, this
command functions in the same way as the Identify Device command.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 0Ch).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
1
x
1
x
0
x
1
1
1
0
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
C141-E249
5-105
Interface
Table 5.34 Information to be read by IDENTIFY DEVICE command (1/3)
Word
Value
Description
0
1
X’045A’
X’3FFF’
X’C837’
X’0010’
X’0000’
X’003F’
X’0000’
General Configuration
Number of Logical cylinders
Detailed Configuration
Number of Logical Heads
Undefined
*1
*2
*3
*2
2
3
4-5
6
Number of Logical sectors per Logical track
Undefined
*2
7-9
10-19
20
Set by a device Serial number (ASCII code, 20 characters, right)
X’0003’
X’xxxx’
X’0000’
–
Undefined
21
Buffer Size (1 LSB: 512 Bytes) ex. Buffer Size=8MBytes: X’4000’
Reserved
22
23-26
27-46
47
Firmware revision (ASCII code, 8 characters, left)
Set by a device Model name (ASCII code, 40 characters, left)
X’8010’
Maximum number of sectors per block on READ/WRITE
MULTIPLE command
48
49
X’0000’
X’2F00’
X’4000’
X’0200’
X’0200’
X’0007’
(Variable)
(Variable)
(Variable)
(Variable)
*8
Reserved
Capabilities
*4
*5
*6
50
Capabilities
51
PIO data transfer mode
Reserved
52
53
Enable/disable setting of words 54-58 and 64-70, 88
Number of current Cylinders
Number of current Head
Number of current sectors per track
Total number of current sectors
*7
54
55
56
57-58
59
Transfer sector count currently set by READ/WRITE MULTIPLE
command *8
60-61
62
*2
Total number of user addressable sectors (LBA mode only) *2
Reserved
X’0000’
X’xx07’
X’0003’
63
Multiword DMA transfer mode
*9
64
Advance PIO transfer mode support status
*10
5-106
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
Table 5.34 Information to be read by IDENTIFY DEVICE command (2/3)
Word
Value
Description
65
66
X’0078’
X’0078’
X’0078’
X’0078’
X’0000’
X’001F’
X’0702’
X’0000’
X’004C’
X’00xx’
X’01F8’
X’0021’
X’346B’
X’7F09’
X’61xx’
*15
Minimum multiword DMA transfer cycle time per word: 120 [ns]
Manufacturer’s recommended DMA transfer cycle time: 120 [ns]
Minimum PIO transfer cycle time without IORDY flow control: 120 [ns]
Minimum PIO transfer cycle time with IORDY flow control: 120 [ns]
Reserved
67
68
69-74
75
Queue depth
*11
*12
76
Serial ATA capabilities
77
Reserved for Serial ATA
Support of Serial ATA function
Valid of Serial ATA function
Major version number
78
*13
*14
*11
79
80
81
Minor version number
82
Support of command sets
Support of command sets
Support of command sets/function
Valid of command sets/function
Valid of command sets/function
Default of command sets/function
Ultra DMA transfer mode
*12
*13
*14
*15
*16
*17
*18
*19
83
84
85
86
*16
87
*17
88
X’xx3F’
89
Set by a device Security Erase Unit execution time (1 LSB: 2 min.)
90
X’0000’
(Variable)
(Variable)
X’0000’
(Variable)
X’0000’
X’xx’
Enhanced Security Erase Unit execution time (1 LSB: 2 min.)
91
Advance power management level
Master password revision
COMRESET Result
92
93
94
Acoustic Management level
Reserved
*21
95-99
100-103
Total number of sectors accessible by users in the 48-bit LBA mode
*22
104-105
106
X’00’
*26
Reserved
Physical sector size per logical sector
Reserved
107
X’0000’
C141-E249
5-107
Interface
Table 5.34 Information to be read by IDENTIFY DEVICE command (3/3)
Word
108
Value
Description
15:12 NAA_ID(3:0) 05h
X’xxxx’
11:0 IEEE Company ID (23:12) 00h
109
X’xxxx’
15:4 IEEE Company ID (11:0) 0Eh
3:0
Unique ID (35:32)
110
111
X’xxxx’
X’xxxx’
X’0000’
X’0100’
X’400x’
X’400x’
X’0000’
X’0xxx’
X’xxxx’
X’0000’
X’003D’
X’0000’
X’xxxx’
X’xxxx’
X’0000’
X’100F’
X’0021’
X’0000’
X’xxA5’
15:0 Unique ID (31:16)
15:0 Unique ID (15:0)
Reserved
112-116
117-118
119
Number of words for logical sectors
Features Implemented Word (Supported Settings)
Features Implemented Word (Enabled Settings)
Reserved
120
121-127
128
Security status
*23
*30
129-159
160-205
206
Undefined
Reserved
SCT Command sets supported
Reserved
207-209
210-211
212-213
214-221
222
Write Read Verify Sector Count Mode 3 Only
Write Read Verify Sector Count Mode 2 Only
Reserved
*31
*32
Transport major version number
Transport minor version number
Reserved
223
224-254
255
Check sum (The 2 complement of the lower order byte resulting from
summing bits 7 to 0 of word 0 to 254 and word 255, in byte units.)
*1 Word 0: General configuration
Bit 15:
ATA device = 0, ATAPI device = 1
Bits 14-8: Undefined
Bit 7:
Bit 6:
Removable disk drive = 1
Fixed drive = 1
Bits 5-3: Undefined
Bit 2: IDENTIFY DEVICE Valid = 0
5-108
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
Bits 1-0: Reserved
*2 Word 1, 3, 6, 60-61
Word MHW2120BS MHW2100BS MHW2080BS MHW2060BS MHW2040BS
1
X’3FFF’
X’10’
X’3FFF’
X’10’
X’3FFF’
X’10’
X’3FFF’
X’10’
X’3FFF’
X’10’
3
6
X’3F’
X ’3F ’
X’3F’
X’3F’
X’3F’
60-61
X’DF94BB0’
X’BA52230’
X’950F8B0’
X’6FC7C80’
X’4A85300’
*3 Status of the Word 2 Identify information is shown as follows:
37C8h
8C73h
C837h
Others
The device requires the SET FEATURES sub-command after the
power-on sequence in order to spin-up. The Identify information
is incomplete.
The device requires the SET FEATURES sub-command after the
power-on sequence in order to spin-up. The Identify information
is incomplete.
The device requires the SET FEATURES sub-command after the
power-on sequence in order to spin-up. The Identify information
is incomplete.
Reserved
*4 Word 49: Capabilities
Bits 15-14: Reserved
Bit 13:
Bit 12:
Bit 11:
Standby timer value. ATA spec is '1.'
Reserved
'1' = IORDY supported
Bit 10:
Bit 9:
Bit 8:
'1' = IORDY inhibition supported
'1' = DMA supported
'1' = LBA supported
Bits 7-0: Undefined
C141-E249
5-109
Interface
*5 Word 50: Device capability
Bit 15:
Bit 14:
0
1
Bit 13 to 1 Reserved
Bit 0 Standby timer value '1' = Standby timer value of the device is the
smallest value.
*6 Word 51: PIO data transfer mode
Bits 15-8: PIO data transfer mode
Bits 7-0: Undefined
X’02’=PIO mode 2 supported
*7 Word 53: Enable/disable setting of word 54-58 and 64-70
Bits 15-3: Reserved
Bit 2:
Bit 1:
Bit 0:
'1' = Enable the word 88
'1' = Enable the word 64-70
'1' = Enable the word 54-58
*8 Word 59: Transfer sector count currently set by READ/WRITE
MULTIPLE command
Bits 15-9: Reserved
Bit 8:
'1' = Enable the multiple sector transfer
Bits 7-0: Transfer sector count currently set by READ/WRITE MULTIPLE
command without interrupt supports 2, 4, 8 and 16 sectors.
*9 Word 63: Multiword DMA transfer mode
Bits 15-11: Reserved
Bit 10:
Bit 9:
Bit 8:
'1' = multiword DMA mode 2 is selected.
'1' = multiword DMA mode 1 is selected.
'1' = multiword DMA mode 0 is selected.
Bits 7-3: Reserved
Bit 2:
Bit 1:
Bit 0:
'1' = Multiword DMA mode 2, 1, and 0 supported (Bit 1 = 0 = '1')
'1' = Multiword DMA mode 1, and 0 supported (Bit 0 = '1')
'1' = Mode 0
5-110
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
*10 Word 64: Advance PIO transfer mode support status
Bits 15-8: Reserved
Bits 7-0: Advance PIO transfer mode
Bit 1:
Bit 0:
'1' = Mode 4 supported
'1' = Mode 3 supported
*11 WORD 75: X ' 001F ' (32)
*12 WORD 76
Bits 15-11: Reserved
Bit 10:
Bit 9:
'1' = Supports the PHY event counter.
'1' = Supports the Power Management initiation request from
the host system.
Bit 8:
'1' = Supports the Native command queueing.
Bits 7-4: Reserved
Bit 3:
Bit 2:
Bit 1:
Reserved for SATA
'1' = Supports the Gen-2 signaling speed.
'1' = Supports the Gen-1 signaling speed (1.5Gbps)
Bit 0: Reserved
C141-E249
5-111
Interface
*13 WORD 78
Bits 15-7: Reserved
Bit 6:
Bit 5:
Bit 4:
Bit 3:
'1' = Supports the software settings preservation.
Reserved
'1'= Supports the in-order data delivery.
'1'= Supports the Power Management initiation from the device to
the host system.
Bit 2:
Bit 1:
'1' = Supports the DMA Setup FIS Auto-Activate optimization.
'1' = Supports the non-zero buffer offset in the DMA Setup FIS.
Reserved
Bit 0:
*14 WORD 79
Bits 15-7: Reserved
Bit 6:
Bit 5:
Bit 4:
Bit 3:
'1' = Enables the software settings preservation.
Reserved
'1' = Enables the in-order data delivery.
'1' = Enables the Power Management initiation function from Bit 2:
'1' = Enables the Auto-Activate optimization function in the DMA
Setup FIS.
Bit 1:
'1' = Enables the non-zero buffer offset function in the DMA
Setup FIS.
Bit 0:
Reserved
*15 WORD 80
Bits 15-9: Reserved
Bit 8:
Bit 7:
Bit 6:
Bit 5:
Bit 4:
Bit 3:
Bit 2:
'1' = ATA/ATAPI-8 ACS/ST supported
'1' = ATA/ATAPI-7 supported
'1' = ATA/ATAPI-6 supported
'1' = ATA/ATAPI-5 supported
'1' = ATA/ATAPI-4 supported
'1' = ATA-3 supported
'1' = ATA-2 supported
Bits 1-0: Undefined
5-112
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
*16 WORD 82
Bit 15:
Bit 14:
Bit 13:
Bit 12:
Bit 11:
Bit 10:
Bit 9:
Undefined
'1' = Supports the NOP command.
'1' = Supports the READ BUFFER command.
'1' = Supports the WRITE BUFFER command.
Undefined
'1' = Supports the Host Protected Area feature set.
'1' = Supports the DEVICE RESET command.
'1' = Supports the SERVICE interrupt.
'1' = Supports the release interrupt.
Bit 8:
Bit 7:
Bit 6:
'1' = Supports the read cache function.
'1' = Supports the write cache function.
'1' = Supports the PACKET command feature set.
'1' = Supports the power management feature set.
'1' = Supports the Removable Media feature set.
'1' = Supports the Security Mode feature set.
'1' = Supports the SMART feature set.
Bit 5:
Bit 4:
Bit 3:
Bit 2:
Bit 1:
Bit 0:
*17 WORD 83
Bit 15:
Bit 14:
Bit 13:
Bit 12:
Bit 11:
Bit 10:
Bit 9:
= 0
= 1
'1' = Supports the FLUSH CACHE EXT command.
'1' = Supports the FLUSH CACHE command.
'1' = Supports the Device Configuration Overlay feature set.
'1' = 48 bit LBA feature set.
'1' = Automatic Acoustic Management feature set.
'1' = Supports the SET MAX Security extending command.
Reserved
Bit 8:
Bit 7:
Bit 6:
'1' = When the power is turned on, spin is started by the SET
FEATURES sub-command.
Bit 5:
Bit 4:
'1' = Supports the Power-Up In Standby set.
'1' = Supports the Removable Media Status Notification feature
set.
C141-E249
5-113
Interface
Bit 3:
Bit 2:
'1' = Supports the Advanced Power Management feature set.
'1' = Supports the CFA (Compact Flash Association) feature set.
'1' = Supports the READ/WRITE DMA QUEUED command.
'1' = Supports the DOWNLOAD MICROCODE command.
Bit 1:
Bit 0:
*18 WORD 84
Bit 15:
= 0 The device always returns the fixed value indicated on the left.
= 1 The device always returns the fixed value indicated on the left.
'1' = Support the Unload Immediate command.
Bit 14:
Bit 13:
Bits 12-9 Reserved
Bit 8
Bit 7
Bit 6
'1' = Support the World wide name.
'1' = Support the WRITE DMA QUEUED FUA EXT command.
'1' = Support the WRITE DMA FUA EXT and WRITE
MULTIPLE FUA EXT commands.
Bit 5
‘1’= Support the General Purpose Logging feature.
Bits 4-2 Reserved
Bit 1:
Bit 0:
'1' = Supports the SMART SELF-TEST.
'1' = Supports the SMART Error Logging.
*19 WORD 85
Bit 15:
Bit 14:
Bit 13:
Bit 12:
Bit 11:
Bit 10:
Bit 9:
Undefined.
'1' = Supports the NOP command.
'1' = Supports the READ BUFFER command.
'1' = Supports the WRITE BUFFER command.
Undefined.
'1' = Supports the Host Protected Area function.
'1' = Supports the DEVICE RESET command.
Bit 8:
'1' = Enables the SERVICE interrupt. From the SET FEATURES
command
Bit 7:
Bit 6:
'1' = Enables the release interrupt. From the SET FEATURES
command
'1' = Enables the read cache function. From the SET FEATURES
command
Bit 5:
Bit 4:
Bit 3:
'1' = Enables the write cache function.
'1' = Enables the P PACKET command set.
'1' = Supports the Power Management function.
5-114
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
'1' = Supports the Removable Media function.
Bit 2:
Bit 1:
'1' = From the SECURITY SET PASSWORD command
'1' = From the SMART ENABLE OPERATION command
Bit 0:
*20 WORD 86
Bit 15:
Bit 14:
'1' = The values in WORD119-120 are valid.
Reserved
Bits 13-10: Same definition as WORD 83.
Bit 9:
'1' = Enables the Automatic Acoustic Management function from
the SET FEATURES command
Bit 8:
'1' = From the SET MAX SET PASSWORD command
Bits 7-6: Same definition as WORD 83.
Bit 5:
Bit 4:
Bit 3:
'1' = Enables the Power-Up In Standby function.
'1' = Enables the Removable Media Status Notification function.
'1' = Enables the Advanced Power Management function.
Bits 2-0: Same definition as WORD 83.
*21 WORD 87
Bit 15:
Bit 14:
= 0 The device always returns the fixed value indicated on the left.
= 1 The device always returns the fixed value indicated on the left.
Bits 13-0: Same definition as WORD 84.
*22 WORD 88
Bit 15-8: Currently used Ultra DMA transfer mode
Bit 14:
Bit 13:
Bit 12:
Bit 11:
Bit 10:
Bit 9:
'1' = Mode 6 is selected.
'1' = Mode 5 is selected.
'1' = Mode 4 is selected.
'1' = Mode 3 is selected.
'1' = Mode 2 is selected.
'1' = Mode 1 is selected.
'1' = Mode 0 is selected.
Bit 8:
Bits 7-0: Supportable Ultra DMA transfer mode
Bit 6:
Bit 5:
Bit 4:
'1' = Supports the Mode 6
'1' = Supports the Mode 5
'1' = Supports the Mode 4
C141-E249
5-115
Interface
Bit 3:
Bit 2:
'1' = Supports the Mode 3
'1' = Supports the Mode 2
'1' = Supports the Mode 1
'1' = Supports the Mode 0
Bit 1:
Bit 0:
*23 WORD 89
Execution time of SECURITY ERASE UNIT command
Value
Time
0
Undefined
1-254
255
Display Value × 2 minutes
More than 508 minutes
*24 WORD 94
Bits 15-8: X'FE' Recommended acoustic management value.
Bits 7-0: X'XX' Current set value.
FE-C0: Performance mode
BF-80: Acoustic mode
00:
Acoustic management is unused it. (It is same as "FE-CO")
*25 WORD 100-103
When "48 bit LBA" of the option (customize) is supported, same number of
LBA as WORD 60-61 is displayed.
*26 WORD 106
Bit 15:
Bit 14:
Bit 13:
Bit 12:
= 0 The device always returns the fixed value indicated on the left.
= 1 The device always returns the fixed value indicated on the left.
'1' = Each device has several logical sectors per physical sector.
'1' = Logical sector of the device is grater than 256 Words.
Bits 11-4: Reserved
Bits 3-0: Logical sector size per physical sector
5-116
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
*27 WORD 119
Bit 15:
Bit 14:
0
1
Bits 13-3: 0
Bit 2:
Bit 1:
Bit 0:
'1' = WRITE UNCORRECTABLE is supported.
'1' = Write-Read-Verify feature set is supported.
'1' = Clearing DRQ bit to zero when error bit is set is supported.
(No Dummy transferring function is supported.)
*28 WORD 120
Bit 15:
0
1
Bit 14:
Bits 13-3: 0
Bit 2:
Bit 1:
'1' = WRITE UNCORRECTABLE is supported.
'1' = Write-Read-Verify feature set is enabled.
'0' = Write-Read-Verify feature set is disabled.
Bit 0:
'1' = Clearing DRQ bit to zero when error bit is set is enabled.
The drive doesn’t execute the dummy transferring.
'0' = Clearing DRQ bit to zero when error bit is set is disabled.
The drive executes the dummy transferring.
*29 WORD 128
Bits 15-9: Reserved
Bit 8:
Security level. 0: High, 1: Maximum
Bits 7-6: Reserved
Bit 5:
Bit 4:
Bit 3:
Bit 2:
Bit 1:
Bit 0:
'1' = Enhanced security erase supported
'1' = Security counter expired
'1' = Security frozen
'1' = Security locked
'1' = Security enabled
'1' = Security supported
C141-E249
5-117
Interface
*30 WORD 206: SCT Command Transport
Bits 15-6: Reserved
Bit 5:
Bit 4:
Bit 3:
Bit 2:
Bit 1:
Bit 0:
'1' = SCT Data Tables supported.
'1' = SCT Features Control supported.
'1' = SCT Error Recovery Control supported.
'1' = SCT Write Same supported.
'1' = SCT Long Sector Access supported.
'1' = SCT Command Transport supported
*31 WORD 210-211: Write Read Verify Sector Count Mode 3 Only. (Optional)
The number of sectors to be verified
If Write Read Verify feature set is enabled. (Mode 3)
Value: 0x400 - 0x40000 sector
*32 WORD 212-213: Write Read Verify Sector Count Mode 2 Only. (Optional)
The number of sectors to be verified
If Write Read Verify feature set is enabled. (Mode 2)
Value: 0x010000 sector
5-118
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
(28) SET FEATURES (X’EF’)
The host system issues the SET FEATURES command to set parameters in the
Features field for the purpose of changing the device features to be executed.
Upon receipt of this command, the device sets the parameters in the Features field,
then reports the status to the host system.
If the value in the Features field is not supported or it is invalid, the device posts
an ABORTED COMMAND error.
Table 5.35 lists the available values and operational modes that may be set in the
Features field.
Table 5.35 Features field values and settable modes (1/2)
Features
Field
Drive operation mode
X ' 02 '
X ' 03 '
X ' 04 '
X ' 05 '
X ' 06 '
X ' 07 '
X ' 0B '
X ' 10 '
X ' 33 '
X ' 42 '
X ' 54 '
X ' 55 '
Enables the write cache function.
Set the data transfer mode.
*1
*2
Enables the automatic reassign. (Note 1)
Enables the advanced power management function.
Enables the Power-Up In Standby function. (Note 1)
Spin up the Power-Up In Standby status device. (Note 1)
Enable Write-Read-Verify feature set
Enables the Serial ATA function.
*5
*3
Undefined (Note 1)
Enables the Acoustic management function.
Undefined (Note 1)
*4
Disables the read cache function.
Clearing DRQ bit to zero when error bit is set is enabled.
The drive does not execute the dummy transferring. (Note 2)
X ' 5F '
X ' 66 '
X ' 77 '
X ' 81 '
X ' 82 '
X ' 84 '
X ' 85 '
X ' 86’
Disables the reverting to power-on default settings after software reset. (Note 1)
Undefined (Note 1)
Disables the 8-bit data transfer. (Note 1)
Disables the write cache function.
Enables the automatic shift. (Note 1)
Set the advanced power management mode to Mode-0.
Disables the Power-Up In Standby function. (Note 1)
C141-E249
5-119
Interface
Table 5.35 Features field values and settable modes (2/2)
Features
Drive operation mode
Field
X ' 88’
X ' 8B’
X ' 90’
X ' 99’
X ' AA '
Undefined (Note 1)
Disable Write-Read-Verify feature set.
Disables the Serial ATA function.
Undefined (Note 1)
*5
Enables the read cache function.
Specifies the transfer of 4-byte ECC for READ LONG and WRITE LONG
commands. (Note 1)
X ' BB '
X ' C2 '
X ' CC '
Disables the Acoustic management function.
Enables the reverting to power-on default settings after software reset. (Note 1)
Clearing DRQ bit to zero when error bit is set is disabled.
The drive executes the dummy transferring. (Note 2)
X ' DF '
Note 1: Although there is a response to the command, nothing is done.
Note 2: Although there is a response to the command and this command reflects on Identify
Device information, DRQ bit is always cleared to zero when error is occurred in PIO
read command (This drive always doesn’t the dummy transferring).
At power-on, the default mode is set as follows:
Write cache function
Transfer mode
: Enabled
: PIO Mode-4, Multiworld DMA Mode-2
Advanced power
management function
: Enabled (Mode-1)
Acoustic
management function
Read cache function
: State keeping
: Enabled
At power-on or COMRESET, the default mode of Serial ATA function is set as
follows:
DMA Setup FIS Auto-Activate optimization
Device-initiated interface power state Transitions
Software Settings Preservation
: Disabled
: Disabled
: Enabled
5-120
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) An undefined code is specified in the FR or SC field (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(2) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block O registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
1
x
1
x
0
x
1
1
1
1
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx or *1~3
[See Table 5.6]
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
E
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
C141-E249
5-121
Interface
*1) Data Transfer Mode
The host sets X’03’ to the Features field. By issuing this command with setting a
value to the Sector Count field, the transfer mode can be selected. Upper 5 bits of
the Sector Count register defines the transfer type and lower 3 bits specifies the
binary mode value.
The IDD supports following values in the Sector Count field value. If other value
than below is specified, an ABORTED COMMAND error is posted.
Note: For a serial ATA device, the setting of a data transfer mode is reflected in
WORD 63 and 88 in IdentifyDevice information. However, the actual
data transfer rate depends on the serial ATA signaling rate in WORD 76
in IdentifyDevice information.
Transfer mode
Sector Count file
00000 000 (X’00’)
•
PIO default transfer mode
PIO flow control transfer mode X
00001 000 (X’08’: Mode 0)
00001 001 (X’09’: Mode 1)
00001 010 (X’0A’: Mode 2)
00001 011 (X’0B’: Mode 3)
00001 100 (X’0C’: Mode 4)
•
•
•
Single word DMA Mode X
00010 000 (X ' 10 ' : Mode 0)
00010 001 (X ' 11 ' : Mode 1)
00010 010 (X ' 12 ' : Mode 2)
Multiword DMA transfer mode X
00100 000 (X’20’: Mode 0)
00100 001 (X’21’: Mode 1)
00100 010 (X’22’: Mode 2)
01000 000 (X’40’: Mode 0)
01000 001 (X’41’: Mode 1)
01000 010 (X’42’: Mode 2)
01000 011 (X’43’: Mode 3)
01000 100 (X’44’: Mode 4)
01000 101 (X’45’: Mode 5)
•
Ultra DMA transfer mode X
5-122
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
*2) Advanced Power Management (APM)
The host writes the Sector Count field with the desired power management level
and executes this command with the Features field X’05’, and then Advanced
Power Management is enabled.
The drive automatically shifts to power saving mode up to the specified APM level
when the drive does not receive any commands for a specific time. The sequence in
which the power management level shifts is from Active Idle to Low Power Idle. The
Mode 0 level requires the longest shifting time, depending on the APM level settings.
The settings of the APM level revert to their default values (Mode-1) when power-on
or COMRESET occurs for the drive.
APM Level
Sector Count Field
C0h-FEh
80h-BFh
01h-7Fh
00h, FFh
Mode 0 Active Idle → Low Power Idle
Mode 1 Active Idle → Low Power Idle
Mode 2 Active Idle → Low Power Idle
Reserve (State Keep)
Active Idle:
The spindle motor rotates, and the head is loaded on
the most inner position on media.
Low Power Idle: The spindle motor rotates, and the head is unloaded.
C141-E249
5-123
Interface
*3) Serial ATA Functions
The host can enable and disable the following Serial ATA functions by issuing
this command after setting X'10/90' in the Features field and an applicable value in
the Sector Count field:
Serial ATA function
Sector Count field
Non-zero buffer offset in DMA Setup FIS
DMA Setup FIS Auto-Activate optimization
Device-initiated interface power state Transitions
Guaranteed In-Order Data Delivery
Asynchronous Notification
01h (*1)
02h (*2)
03h (*3)
04h (*1)
05h (*1)
06h (*4)
Software Settings Preservation
*1 The device normally responds to the command but performs no
operation.
*2 This feature is disabled when power is on. While this function is
enabled, the device does not return the DMA Activate FIS for the first
data sector after the WRITE FP DMA QUEUED command is issued.
*3 This feature is disabled when power is on. While this function is
enabled, the device perform interface power save.
*4: This feature is enabled when power is on. While this function is enabled,
the device preserves the software settings across COMRESET.
5-124
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
*4) Automatic Acoustic Management (AAM)
The host writes to the Sector Count filed with the requested acoustic management
level and executes this command with subcommand code 42h, and then Automatic
Acoustic Management is enabled. The AAM level setting is preserved by the
drive across power on and COMRESET.
AAM Level
Sector Count Filed
Performance mode (Fast Seek)
Acoustic mode (Slow Seek)
Abort
C0h-FEh
80h-BFh
01h-7Fh
00h, FFh
Non Operate
High-speed seek to which gives priority to the performance operates as for
"Performance mode", and low-speed seek by which the seek sound is suppressed
operates as for "Acoustic mode".
Setting the seek mode by this command is applied to the seek operation in all
command processing.
*5) Write-Read-Verify feature (optional)
Table 5.36 Write-Read-Verify feature sector counts
SC
SN
Description
00h (Mode 0)
01h (Mode 1)
-
-
Enabled Always
The first 65,536 logical sectors written by the host
after every spin-up (or reset) or after issuing this
set features shall be verified.
02h (Mode 2)
03h (Mode 3)
-
Device may determine, for itself, how many logical
sectors to do.
Verify count
The first (Verify Sector Count x 1024) logical
sectors written by the host after every spin-up or
after issuing this set features shall be verified.
04h-FFh
-
Reserved (Abort)
C141-E249
5-125
Interface
(29) SECURITY SET PASSWORD (X’F1’)
This command enables a user password or master password to be set.
The host transfers the 512-byte data shown in Table 5.37 to the device. The device
determines the operation of the lock function according to the specifications of the
Identifier bit and Security level bit in the transferred data. (Table 5.38)
Issuing this command in LOCKED MODE or FROZEN MODE returns the
Aborted Command error.
Table 5.37 Contents of SECURITY SET PASSWORD data
Word
0
Contents
Control word
Bit 0 Identifier
0 = Sets a user password.
1 = Sets a master password.
Bits 1 to 7 Reserved
Bit 8 Security level
0 = High
1 = Maximum
Bits 9 to 15 Reserved
Password (32 bytes)
1 to 16
17
Master password version number
(This value is valid only when Word 0 Bit 0
is set to one.)
18 to 255 Reserved
Table 5.38 Relationship between combination of Identifier and Security level,
and operation of the lock function
Identifier
User
Level
High
Description
The specified password is set as a new user password. The
lock function is enabled after the device is turned off and
then on. LOCKED MODE can be canceled using the user
password or the master password already set.
Master
User
High
The specified password is set as a new master password.
The lock function is not enabled.
Maximum The specified password is set as a new user password. The
lock function is enabled after the device is turned off and
then on. LOCKED MODE can be canceled using the user
password only. The master password already set cannot
cancel LOCKED MODE.
Master
Maximum The specified password is set as a new master password.
The lock function is not enabled.
5-126
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) The device is in Security Locked mode (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(2) The device is in Security Frozen mode (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(3) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
1
x
1
x
1
x
0
0
0
1
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Register contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
C141-E249
5-127
Interface
(30) SECURITY UNLOCK(X’F2’)
This command cancels LOCKED MODE.
The host transfers the 512-byte data shown in Table 5.39 to the device. Operation
of the device varies as follows depending on whether the host specifies the master
password.
•
•
When the master password is selected
When the security level is LOCKED MODE is high, the password is compared
with the master password already set. If the passwords are the same, LOCKED
MODE is canceled. Otherwise, the Aborted Command error is returned. If the
security level in LOCKED MODE is set to the highest level, the Aborted
Command error is always returned.
When the user password is selected
The password is compared with the user password already set. If the passwords
are the same, LOCKED MODE is canceled. Otherwise, the Aborted Command
error is returned.
If the password comparison fails, the device decrements the UNLOCK counter.
The UNLOCK counter initially has a value of five. When the value of the
UNLOCK counter reaches zero, this command or the SECURITY ERASE UNIT
command causes the Aborted Command error until the device is turned off and
then on. Issuing this command with LOCKED MODE canceled (in UNLOCK
MODE) has no affect on the UNLOCK counter.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) An incorrect password is specified (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(2) The device is in Security Frozen mode (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(3) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
1
x
1
x
1
x
0
0
1
0
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
5-128
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
At command completion (Shadow Block Register contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
C141-E249
5-129
Interface
(31) SECURITY ERASE PREPARE (X’F3’)
The SECURITY ERASE UNIT command feature is enabled by issuing the
SECURITY ERASE PREPARE command and then the SECURITY ERASE
UNIT command. The SECURITY ERASE PREPARE command prevents data
from being erased unnecessarily by the SECURITY ERASE UNIT command.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) The device is in Security Frozen mode (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(2) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
1
x
1
x
1
x
1
x
0
0
1
1
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
5-130
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
(32) SECURITY ERASE UNIT (X’F4’)
This command erases all user data. This command also invalidates the user
password and releases the lock function.
The host transfers the 512-byte data shown in Table 5.39 to the device. The device
compares the user password or master password in the transferred data with the user
password or master password already set. The device erases user data, invalidates
the user password, and releases the lock function if the passwords are the same.
Although this command invalidates the user password, the master password is
retained.
To recover the master password, issue the SECURITY SET PASSWORD
command and reset the user password.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) An incorrect password is specified (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(2) The Security Erase Prepare command did not complete normally beforehand
(ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(3) The device is in Security Frozen mode (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(4) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
1
x
1
x
1
x
1
x
0
1
0
0
xx
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
Status information
DH
x
x
x
x
xx
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
C141-E249
5-131
Interface
(33) SECURITY FREEZE LOCK (X’F5’)
This command puts the device into FROZEN MODE. The following commands
used to change the lock function return the Aborted Command error if the device
is in FROZEN MODE.
•
•
•
•
•
SECURITY SET PASSWORD
SECURITY UNLOCK
SECURITY DISABLE PASSWORD
SECURITY ERASE PREPARE
SECURITY ERASE UNIT
FROZEN MODE is canceled when the power is turned off.
If this command is reissued in FROZEN MODE, the command is completed and
FROZEN MODE remains unchanged.
The following medium access commands return the Aborted Command error when
the device is in LOCKED MODE:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
READ DMA (EXT)
READ MULTIPLE (EXT)
READ SECTORS (EXT)
READ VERIFY SECTORS (EXT)
WRITE DMA (EXT)
WRITE MULTIPLE (EXT)
WRITE SECTORS (EXT)
WRITE VERIFY
SECURITY DISABLE PASSWORD
SECURITY FREEZE LOCK
SECURITY SET PASSWORD
SET MAX ADDRESS (EXT)
FLUSH CACHE (EXT)
DEVICE CONFIGURATION RESTORE
DEVICE CONFIGURATION SET
5-132
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
DEVICE CONFIGURATION FREEZE LOCK
DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY
WRITE MULTIPLE FUA EXT
WRITE DMA FUA EXT
READ FP DMA QUEUED
WRITE FP DMA QUEUED
READ LOG EXT
WRITE LOG EXT
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) The device is in Security Locked mode (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(2) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
1
x
1
x
1
x
0
1
0
1
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
C141-E249
5-133
Interface
(34) SECURITY DISABLE PASSWORD (X’F6’)
This command invalidates the user password already set and releases the lock
function.
The host transfers the 512-byte data shown in Table 5.39 to the device. The
device compares the user password or master password in the transferred data with
the user password or master password already set, and releases the lock function if
the passwords are the same.
Although this command invalidates the user password, the master password is
retained. To recover the master password, issue the SECURITY SET
PASSWORD command and reset the user password.
If the user password or master password transferred from the host does not match,
the Aborted Command error is returned.
Issuing this command while in LOCKED MODE or FROZEN MODE returns the
Aborted Command error.
(The section about the SECURITY FREEZE LOCK command describes
LOCKED MODE and FROZEN MODE.)
Table 5.39 Contents of security password
Word
0
Contents
Control word
Bit 0: Identifier
0 = Compares the user passwords.
1 = Compares the master passwords.
Bits 1 to 15: Reserved
1 to 16
Password (32 bytes)
17 to 255 Reserved
5-134
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) An incorrect password is specified (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(2) The device is in Security Locked mode (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(3) The device is in Security Frozen mode (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(4) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents))
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
1
x
1
x
1
x
0
1
1
0
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
C141-E249
5-135
Interface
(35) READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS (X’F8’)
This command posts the maximum address intrinsic to the device, which can be
set by the SET MAX ADDRESS command. Upon receipt of this command, the
device indicates the maximum address in the DH, CH, CL and SN field. Then
reports the status to the host system.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
1
1
x
1
x
1
0
0
0
L
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
Max head/LBA [MSB]
x
x
x
x
CYL No. [MSB] / LBA
CYL No. [LSB] / LBA
SCT No.
/ LBA[LSB]
xx
Error information
5-136
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
(36) SET MAX (X’F9’)
SET MAX Features Register Values
Value
00h
Command
Obsolete
01h
SET MAX SET PASSWORD
SET MAX LOCK
02h
03h
SET MAX UNLOCK
SET MAX FREEZE LOCK
Reserved
04h
05h - FFh
•
SET MAX ADDRESS
A successful READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS command shall immediately
precede a SET MAX ADDRESS command.
This command allows the maximum address accessible by the user to be set in LBA
or CHS mode. Upon receipt of the command, the device saves the maximum
address specified in the DH, CH, CL and SN field then, reports the status to the host.
The new address information set by this command is reflected in Words 1, 54, 57,
58, 60 and 61 of IDENTIFY DEVICE information. If an attempt is made to
perform a read or write operation for an address beyond the new address space, an
ID Not Found error will result.
When SC field bit 0, VV (Value Volatile), is 1, the value set by this command is
held even after power on. When the VV bit is 0, the value set by this command
becomes invalid when the power is turned on, and the maximum address returns to
the value most lately set when VV bit = 1. (When the command with VV=1 has
not issued before, the maximum address returns to the default value.)
When the READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS command has been issued
immediately preceding this command, this command operates normally as the SET
MAX ADDRESS command. Otherwise, this command operates as one of the
SET MAX subcommands depending on the value in the Features field. The
subcommands are explained below.
After power on, the host can issue this command only once when VV bit = 1. If this
command with VV bit = 1 is issued twice or more, any command following the first
time will result in an ID Not Found error.
When the SET MAX ADDRESS EXT command is executed, SET MAX
ADDRESS command is aborted. The address value returns to the origin when the
SET MAX ADDRESS EXT command is executed using the address value
returned by the READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS command.
C141-E249
5-137
Interface
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) The command has been issued more than twice (ST = 51h, ER = 10h).
(2) The READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS command has not been issued prior to
the SET MAX ADDRESS command. (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(3) The SET MAX ADDRESS (EXT) command has been issued
(ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(4) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
1
1
x
1
x
1
0
0
1
L
HD No./LBA
CYL No. [MSB] / LBA
CYL No. [LSB] / LBA
SCT No.
/ LBA[LSB]
xx
VV
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
Status information
x xx
ST
DH
x
x
x
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
CYL No. [MSB] / LBA
CYL No. [LSB] / LBA
SCT No.
/ LBA[LSB]
xx
Error information
•
SET MAX SET PASSWORD (Features Field = 01h)
This command requests a transfer of 1 sector of data from the host, and defines the
contents of SET MAX password. The password is retained by the device until the
next power cycle.
5-138
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) The device is in Set Max Locked mode or Set Max Freeze Locked mode
(ST = 51h, ER =04h).
(2) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
1
x
1
x
1
x
1
x
1
0
0
1
xx
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
xx
xx
xx
xx
01
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
Status information
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
Password information
Words
Contents
0
Reserved
1 to 16
Password (32 bytes)
Reserved
17 to 255
C141-E249
5-139
Interface
•
SET MAX LOCK (Features Field = 02h)
The SET MAX LOCK command sets the device into SET_MAX_LOCK state.
After this command is completed, any other SET MAX commands except SET
MAX UNLOCK and SET MAX FREEZE LOCK commands are rejected. And
the device returns command aborted.
The device remains in the SET MAX LOCK state until a power cycle or the
acceptance of SET MAX UNLOCK or SET MAX FREEZE LOCK command.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) The device is in Set Max Locked mode or Set Max Freeze Locked mode
(ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(2) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
1
x
1
x
1
x
1
x
1
0
0
1
xx
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
xx
xx
xx
xx
02
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
Status information
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
5-140
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
•
SET MAX UNLOCK (Features Field = 03h)
This command requests a transfer of single sector of data from the host, and
defines the contents of SET MAX ADDRESS password.
The password supplied in the sector of data transferred shall be compared with the
stored password.
If the password compare fails, the device returns command aborted and
decrements the Unlock counter, and remains in the Set Max Lock state. On the
acceptance of the SET MAX LOCK command, the Unlock counter is set to a
value of five. When this counter reaches zero, then SET MAX UNLOCK
command returns command aborted until a power cycle.
If the password compare matches, then the device makes a transition to the Set
Max Unlocked state and all SET MAX commands will be accepted.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) The device is in Set Max Locked mode or Set Max Freeze Locked mode
(ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(2) The device is in Set Max Unlocked mode (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(3) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
1
x
1
x
1
x
1
0
0
1
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
03
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
C141-E249
5-141
Interface
•
SET MAX FREEZE LOCK (Features Field = 04h)
The Set MAX FREEZE LOCK command sets the device to SET_MAX_Frozen
state.
After the device made a transition to the Set Max Freeze Lock state, the following
SET MAX commands are rejected, then the device returns command aborted:
−
−
−
−
−
SET MAX ADDRESS
SET MAX SET PASSWORD
SET MAX LOCK
SET MAX UNLOCK
SET MAX FREEZE LOCK
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) The device is in Set Max Locked mode or Set Max Freeze Locked mode
(ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(2) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
1
x
1
x
1
x
1
x
1
0
0
1
xx
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
xx
xx
xx
xx
04
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
Status information
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
5-142
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
(37) READ SECTOR (S) EXT (X’24’)
•
Description
This command is the extended command of the READ SECTOR (S) command.
The LBA specification is increased from 28 bits to 48 bits, and the maximum
number of sectors that can be transferred by a single command is changed from
100h to 10000h. Other command controls are the same as those of the READ
SECTOR (S) command.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) The command was issued in CHS mode (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
The other error reporting conditions are the same as those of the READ
SECTOR(S) command.
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
0
1
0
1
1
0
x
0
1
0
0
L
xx
CH EXP
CH
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
Sector count (15-8)
Sector count (7-0)
FR EXP
FR
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
Status information
x
DH
1
L
1
xx
CH EXP
CH
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
xx
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
xx
ER
Error information
C141-E249
5-143
Interface
(38) READ DMA EXT (X’25’)
•
Description
This command is the extended command of the READ DMA command. The
LBA specification is increased from 28 bits to 48 bits, and the maximum
number of sectors that can be transferred by a single command is changed
from 100h to 10000h. Other command controls are the same as those of the
READ DMA command.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) The command was issued in CHS mode (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
The other error reporting conditions are the same as those of the READ DAM
command.
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
0
1
0
1
1
0
x
0
1
0
1
L
xx
CH EXP
CH
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
SC EXP
SC
Sector count (15-8)
Sector count (7-0)
FR EXP
FR
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
Status information
x
DH
1
L
1
xx
CH EXP
CH
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
xx
xx
ER
Error information
5-144
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
(39) READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS EXT (X’27’)
•
Description
This command is used to assign the highest address that the device can initially set
with the SET MAX ADDRESS EXT command. The maximum address is
displayed in the CH(EXP), CL(EXP), SN(EXP) filed of the device shadow block
registers.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) This command is issued with LBA = 0. (ST = 51h, ER= 04h)
(2) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
0
1
0
1
1
0
x
0
1
1
1
L
xx
CH EXP
CH
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
FR EXP
FR
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
Status information
x
1
L
1
xx
CH EXP
CH
Native max address LBA (47-40)
Native max address LBA (23-16)
Native max address LBA (39-32)
Native max address LBA (15-8)
Native max address LBA (31-24)
Native max address LBA (7-0)
xx
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
xx
ER
Error information
C141-E249
5-145
Interface
(40) READ MULTIPLE EXT (X’29’)
•
Description
This command is the extended command of the READ MULTIPLE command.
The LBA specification is increased from 28 bits to 48 bits, and the maximum
number of sectors that can be transferred by a single command is changed from
100h to 10000h. Other command controls are the same as those of the READ
MULTIPLE command.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) The command was issued in CHS mode (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
The other error reporting conditions are the same as those of the READ
MULTIPLE command.
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
0
1
0
1
1
0
x
1
0
0
1
L
xx
CH EXP
CH
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
Sector count (15-8)
Sector count (7-0)
FR EXP
FR
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
Status information
x
1
L
1
xx
CH EXP
CH
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
xx
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
xx
ER
Error information
5-146
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
(41) READ LOG EXT (X'2F')
The READ LOG EXTEND command reads versatile log data. Versatile log data
includes the Extended SMART Comprehensive Error log, the Extended SMART
Self-test log, and the SMART Selective log. The effectiveness of the log types
depends on customization. For the protocol concerning data transfers, see Section
5.4.
The number of the log to be read is specified as the Log address. For log data
consisting of multiple sectors, a sector offset can be specified as an instruction so
that data transfer starts from the specified sector. The number of sectors to be
transferred is specified as the Sector count.
If an error occurs in the FP Queued protocol, Read Log Ext log page 10h
containing the error information is transferred. This Read Log Ext log page can be
read by specifying Sector offset = 00h, Sector count = 01h, and Log address =
10h. For the data format of Read Log Ext log page 10h, see Table 5.40.
The events of the PHY level on an interface are collected and it registers with
Read Log Extend page 11h. This Read Log Ext log page can be read by specifying
Sector offset = 00h, Sector count = 01h, and Log address = 11h. For the data
format of Read Log Ext log page 11h, see Table 5.42.
If this command is not supported, or if an invalid value is specified for the Log
address, Sector count, or Sector offset, the Aborted Command error occurs.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) An error was detected during power-on processing (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(2) An error was detected during wake-up processing (in cases where wake-up
processing is required before execution of this command)
(ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(3) An error that cannot be corrected with ECC occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 40h).
(4) The sync byte indicating the beginning of a sector was not found
(ST = 51h, ER = 01h).
(5) An invalid log sector address or invalid Sector count (number of sectors to be
transferred) is specified (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(6) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 0Ch).
C141-E249
5-147
Interface
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
0
x
0
x
1
x
0
x
1
1
1
1
xx
CH EXP
CH
xx
xx
CL EXP
CL
Sector offset (15-8)
Sector offset (7-0)
xx
SN EXP
SN
Log address
Sector count (15-8)
Sector count (7-0)
xx
SC EXP
SC
FR EXP
FR
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
CH EXP
CH
xx
xx
CL EXP
CL
xx
xx
SN EXP
SN
xx
xx
SC EXP
SC
xx
xx
ER
Error information
5-148
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
Table 5.40 Data format of Read Log Ext log page 10h
Byte
Item
00
01
Tag field
Reserved
02
Status field value
Error field value
03
04
Sector Number field value
Cylinder Low field value
Cylinder High field value
Dev/Head field value
05
06
07
08
Sector Number Exp field value
Cylinder Low Exp field value
Cylinder High Exp field value
Reserved
09
0A
0B
0C
Sector Count field value
Sector Count Exp field value
Reserved
0D
0E to FF
100 to 1FE Vendor Unique
1FF
Check sum
Table 5.41 Tag field information
Bit
Description
If bit 7 is 0, this field has an error tag number.
Reserved
0 … 4
5
6
7
If this bit is 0, the field consisting of bits 0 to 4 has an
error tag number.
C141-E249
5-149
Interface
Table 5.42 Data format of Read Log Ext log page 11h
Byte Item
00 to 03
04 to 05
06 to 09
0A to 0B
0C to 0F
…
Reserved
Counter 1 Identifier
Counter 1 Value
Counter 2 Identifier
Counter 2 Value
…
4C to 4D
4E to 51
52 to 53
Counter 10 Identifier
Counter 10 Value
Counter 0 Identifier
54 to 1FE Reserved
1FF Check sum
Table 5.43 Counter Identifier information
Identifier
Description
0
1
No counter value : marks end of counters in the page
Command failed due to an ICRC error
2
Data FIS R_ERR ending status (transmitted and received)
Data FIS R_ERR ending status (transmitted)
3
4
Data FIS R_ERR ending status (received)
5
Non-data FIS R_ERR ending status (transmitted and received)
Non-data FIS R_ERR ending status (transmitted)
Non-data FIS retries (transmitted)
6
8
9
Transitions from drive PhyRdy to drive PhyNRdy.
Signature Device to Host Register FIS sent due to a COMRESET.
CRC errors within the FIS (received)
A
B
D
F
10
Non-CRC errors within the FIS (received)
Data FIS R_ERR ending status due to CRC errors (received)
Data FIS R_ERR ending status due to non-CRC errors (received)
5-150
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
•
SCT STATUS REQUEST (SN = E0h)
Refer to SMART Command Transport (SCT).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting)
CM
DH
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
L
DV
xx
CH EXP
CH
xx
xx
CL EXP
CL
00h
00h
xx
SN EXP
SN
E0h
00h
01h
xx
SC EXP
SC
FR EXP
FR
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
Status information
x
x
x
DV
xx
CH EXP
CH
xx
xx
CL EXP
CL
xx
xx
SN EXP
SN
xx
xx
SC EXP
SC
xx
xx
ER
Error information
C141-E249
5-151
Interface
•
SCT READ DATA (SN = E1h, FR = D5)
Refer to SMART Command Transport (SCT).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting)
CM
DH
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
L
DV
xx
CH EXP
CH
xx
xx
CL EXP
CL
00h
00h
xx
SN EXP
SN
E1h
xx
SC EXP
SC
xx
FR EXP
FR
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
Status information
x
x
x
DV
xx
CH EXP
CH
xx
xx
CL EXP
CL
xx
xx
SN EXP
SN
xx
xx
SC EXP
SC
xx
xx
ER
Error information
5-152
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
(42) WRITE SECTOR (S) EXT (X’34’)
•
Description
This command is the extended command of the WRITE SECTOR (S) command.
The LBA specification is increased from 28 bits to 48 bits, and the maximum
number of sectors that can be transferred by a single command is changed from
100h to 10000h. Other command controls are the same as those of the WRITE
SECTOR (S) command.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) The command was issued in CHS mode (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
The other error reporting conditions are the same as those of the WRITE
SECTOR(S) command.
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
0
1
0
1
1
1
x
0
1
0
0
L
xx
CH EXP
CH
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
Sector count (15-8)
Sector count (7-0)
FR EXP
FR
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
Status information
x
1
L
1
xx
CH EXP
CH
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
xx
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
xx
ER
Error information
C141-E249
5-153
Interface
(43) WRITE DMA EXT (X’35’)
•
Description
This command is the extended command of the WRITE DMA command. The
LBA specification is increased from 28 bits to 48 bits, and the maximum number
of sectors that can be transferred by a single command is changed from 100h to
10000h. Other command controls are the same as those of the WRITE DMA
command.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) The command was issued in CHS mode (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
The other error reporting conditions are the same as those of the WRITE
DMA command.
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
0
1
0
1
1
1
x
0
1
0
1
L
xx
CH EXP
CH
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
Sector count (15-8)
Sector count (7-0)
FR EXP
FR
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
Status information
x
1
L
1
xx
CH EXP
CH
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
xx
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
xx
ER
Error information
5-154
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
(44) SET MAX ADDRESS EXT (X’37’)
• Description
This command limits specifications so that the highest address that can be
accessed by users can be specified only in LBA mode.
The address information specified with this command is set in words 1, 54, 57, 58,
60, 61, and 100 to 103 of the IDENTIFY DEVICE command response. If read or
write processing is executed for an address that is outside of the new address
space, an ID Not Found error occurs.
When SC field bit 0, VV (Value Volatile), is 1, the value set by this command is
held even after power on or COMRESET. When the VV bit is 0, the value set by
this command becomes invalid when the power is turned on, and the maximum
address returns to the value most lately set when VV bit = 1. (When the
command with VV=1 has not issued before, the maximum address returns to the
default value.)
After power on, the host can issue this command only once when VV bit = 1. If this
command with VV bit = 1 is issued twice or more, any command following the first
time will result in an ID Not Found error.
When the SET MAX ADDRESS EXT command is executed, SET MAX
ADDRESS command is aborted. The address value returns to the origin when the
SET MAX ADDRESS EXT command is executed using the address value
returned by the READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS command.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) This command is issued twice or more in an operation sequence.
(ST = 51h, ER = 10h)
(2) The READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS EXT command (27h) is not issued
immediately before this command (ST = 51h, ER = 04h) is issued.
(3) This command is issued in CHS mode (ST = 51h, ER = 04h)
(4) The SET MAX ADDRESS command has already been issued.
(ST = 51h, ER = 04h)
(5) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
C141-E249
5-155
Interface
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
0
1
0
1
1
1
x
0
1
1
1
L
xx
CH EXP
CH
SET MAX LBA (47-40)
SET MAX LBA (23-16)
CL EXP
CL
SET MAX LBA (39-32)
SET MAX LBA (15-8)
SN EXP
SN
SET MAX LBA (31-24)
SET MAX LBA (7-0)
SC EXP
SC
xx
xx
VV
FR EXP
FR
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
Status information
x
1
L
1
xx
CH EXP
CH
SET MAX LBA (47-40)
SET MAX LBA (23-16)
SET MAX LBA (39-32)
SET MAX LBA (15-8)
SET MAX LBA (31-24)
SET MAX LBA (7-0)
xx
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
xx
ER
Error information
5-156
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
(45) WRITE MULTIPLE EXT (X’39’)
•
Description
This command is the extended command of the WRITE MULTIPLE command.
The LBA specification is increased from 28 bits to 48 bits, and the maximum
number of sectors that can be transferred by a single command is changed from
100h to 10000h. Other command controls are the same as those of the WRITE
MULTIPLE command.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) The command was issued in CHS mode (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
The other error reporting conditions are the same as those of the WRITE
MULTIPLE command.
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
0
1
0
1
1
1
x
1
0
0
1
L
xx
CH EXP
CH
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
Sector count (15-8)
Sector count (7-0)
FR EXP
FR
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
Status information
DH
CH EXP
CH
1
L
1
x
xx
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
xx
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
xx
ER
Error information
C141-E249
5-157
Interface
(46) WRITE LOG EXT (X'3F')
The WRITE LOG EXTEND command writes versatile log data. Versatile log
data includes the Extended SMART Comprehensive Error log, the Extended
SMART Self-test log, and the SMART Selective log; and each log can be partially
written with this command. The effectiveness of the log types depends on
customization. For the protocol concerning data transfers, see Section 5.4.
The number of a log to be written is specified as the Log address. For log data
consisting of multiple sectors, a sector offset can be specified as an instruction so
that data transfer starts from the specified sector. The number of sectors to be
transferred is specified as the Sector count.
If this command is not supported, or if an invalid value is specified for the Log
address, Sector count, or Sector offset, the Aborted Command error occurs.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) An error was detected during power-on processing (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(2) An error was detected during wake-up processing (in cases where wake-up
processing is required before execution of this command) (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(3) A write fault was detected while the write cache was disabled
(ST = 71h, ER = 10h).
(4) While the write cache is enabled, if the status indicating a completed transfer
(STS = 50h) is returned and a data write operation failed because a write fault
was detected during the data write operation, Abort will be returned for all
subsequent ATA commands (ST = 71h, ER = 04h). This state is cleared the
next time that the device is turned on.
(5) An invalid log sector address or invalid Sector count (number of sectors to be
transferred) is specified (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(6) The failure prediction capability is disabled (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(7) A check sum error was detected in the data transferred (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(8) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 0Ch).
5-158
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
0
x
0
x
1
x
1
x
1
1
1
1
xx
CH EXP
CH
xx
xx
CL EXP
CL
Sector offset (15-8)
Sector offset (7-0)
xx
SN EXP
SN
Log address
Sector count (15-8)
Sector count (7-0)
xx
SC EXP
SC
FR EXP
FR
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
CH EXP
CH
xx
xx
CL EXP
CL
xx
xx
SN EXP
SN
xx
xx
SC EXP
SC
xx
xx
ER
Error information
C141-E249
5-159
Interface
•
SCT COMMAND SET (SN = E0h)
Refer to SMART Command Transport (SCT).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting)
CM
DH
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
L
DV
xx
CH EXP
CH
xx
xx
CL EXP
CL
00h
00h
xx
SN EXP
SN
E0h
00h
01h
xx
SC EXP
SC
FR EXP
FR
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
Status information
x
x
x
DV
xx
CH EXP
CH
xx
xx
CL EXP
CL
xx
xx
SN EXP
SN
xx
xx
SC EXP
SC
xx
xx
ER
Error information
5-160
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
•
SCT WRITE DATA (SN = E1h )
Refer to SMART Command Transport(SCT).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting)
CM
DH
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
L
DV
xx
CH EXP
CH
xx
xx
CL EXP
CL
00h
00h
xx
SN EXP
SN
E1h
xx
SC EXP
SC
xx
FR EXP
FR
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
Status information
x
x
x
DV
xx
CH EXP
CH
xx
xx
CL EXP
CL
xx
xx
SN EXP
SN
xx
xx
SC EXP
SC
xx
xx
ER
Error information
C141-E249
5-161
Interface
(47) READ VERIFY SECTOR (S) EXT (X’42’)
•
Description
This command is the extended command of the READ VERIFY SECTOR (S)
command. The LBA specification is increased from 28 bits to 48 bits, and the
maximum number of sectors that can be transferred by a single command is
changed from 100h to 10000h. Other command controls are the same as those of
the READ VERIFY SECTOR (S) command.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) The command was issued in CHS mode (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
The other error reporting conditions are the same as those of the READ
VERIFY SECTOR(S) command.
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
0
1
1
0
1
0
x
0
0
1
0
L
Xx
CH EXP
CH
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
Sector count (15-8)
Sector count (7-0)
FR EXP
FR
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
Status information
x
1
L
1
xx
CH EXP
CH
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
xx
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
xx
ER
Error information
5-162
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
(48) FLUSH CACHE EXT (X’EA’)
•
Description
This command executes the same operations as the FLUSH CACHE command
(E7h). However, only LBA=1 can be specified in the command.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
1
1
1
1
1
0
x
1
0
1
0
L
xx
CH EXP
CH
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
FR EXP
FR
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
Status information
1
L
1
x
xx
CH EXP
CH
xx
xx
CL EXP
CL
xx
xx
SN EXP
SN
xx
xx
SC EXP
SC
xx
xx
ER
Error information
C141-E249
5-163
Interface
(49) WRITE MULTIPLE FUA EXT (X'CE')
•
Description
The WRITE MULTIPLE FUA EXT command reports the status of a command
after user data is written to a medium, regardless of whether the write cache
feature is enabled or disabled. The other command control and error reporting
conditions are the same as those of the WRITE MULTIPLE EXT command.
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
1
1
1
0
1
0
x
1
1
1
0
L
xx
CH EXP
CH
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
Sector count (15-8)
Sector count (7-0)
FR EXP
FR
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
Status information
x
1
L
1
xx
CH EXP
CH
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
xx
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
xx
ER
Error information
5-164
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
(50) WRITE DMA FUA EXT (X'3D')
•
Description
The WRITE DMA FUA EXT command reports the status of a command after user
data is written to a medium, regardless of whether the write cache feature is
enabled or disabled. The other command control and error reporting conditions
are the same as those of the WRITE DMA EXT command.
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
0
1
0
1
1
1
x
1
1
0
1
L
xx
CH EXP
CH
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
Sector count (15-8)
Sector count (7-0)
FR EXP
FR
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
Status information
x
1
L
1
xx
CH EXP
CH
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
xx
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
xx
ER
Error information
C141-E249
5-165
Interface
(51) READ FP DMA QUEUED (X'60')
•
Description
For details about control of the READ FP DMA QUEUED command, see Section
5.4.6.
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
0
1
1
1
0
x
0
0
0
1
FUA
L
xx
CH EXP
CH
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
xx
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
TAG
xx
FR EXP
FR
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
Status information
1
L
1
x
xx
CH EXP
CH
xx
xx
CL EXP
CL
xx
xx
SN EXP
SN
xx
xx
SC EXP
SC
xx
xx
ER
Error information
FUA: If this bit is 1, the device always reads data from media
regardless of whether the data requested by the host is in the
cache.
TAG: Number of a TAG specified by the host
5-166
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
(52) WRITE FP DMA QUEUED (X'61')
•
Description
For details about control of the WRITE FP DMA QUEUED command, see
Section 5.4.6.
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
0
1
1
1
0
x
0
0
0
1
FUA
L
xx
CH EXP
CH
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
xx
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
TAG
xx
FR EXP
FR
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
Status information
1
L
1
x
xx
CH EXP
CH
xx
xx
CL EXP
CL
xx
xx
SN EXP
SN
xx
xx
SC EXP
SC
xx
xx
ER
Error information
FUA: If this bit is 1, the device always reports the status after data is
written to a medium.
TAG: Number of a TAG specified by the host
C141-E249
5-167
Interface
5.3.3 Error posting
Table 5.44 lists the defined errors that are valid for each command.
Table 5.44 Command code and parameters (1/2)
Error Field
Status Field
COMMAND NAME
SFRW SFRR UNC IDNF ABRT TK0NF DRDY DWF ERR
RECALIBRATE
READ SECTOR(S)
WRITE SECTOR(S)
WRITE VERIFY
READ VERIFY SECTOR(S)
SEEK
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
EXECUTE DEVICE
DIAGNOSTIC
*1
*1
*1
V
*1
INITIALIZE DEVICE
PARAMETERS
V
V
V
V
DOWNLOAD MICROCODE
STANDBY IMMEDIATE
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
IDLE (UNLOAD)
IMMEDIATE
V
V
V
V
V
STANDBY
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
IDLE
CHECK POWER MODE
SLEEP
SMART
V
V
V
V
DEVICE CONFIGURATION
READ MULTIPLE
WRITE MULTIPLE
SET MULTIPLE MODE
READ DMA
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
WRITE DMA
V
READ BUFFER
FLUSH CACHE
WRITE BUFFER
IDENTIFY DEVICE
IDENTIFY DEVICE DMA
SET FEATURES
SECURITY SET PASSWORD
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
5-168
C141-E249
5.3 Host Commands
Table 5.44 Command code and parameters (2/2)
Error Field
Status Field
COMMAND NAME
SFRW SFRR UNC IDNF ABRT TK0NF DRDY DWF ERR
SECURITY UNLOCK
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
SECURITY ERASE PREPARE
SECURITY ERASE UNIT
SECURITY FREEZE LOCK
SECURITY DISABLE
PASSWORD
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
READ NATIVE MAX
ADDRESS
V
V
SET MAX
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
READ SECTOR(S) EXT
READ DMA EXT
V
V
V
V
READ NATIVE MAX
ADDRESS EXT
V
V
V
V
V
READ MULTIPLE EXT
WRITE LOG EXT
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
WRITE SECTOR(S) EXT
WRITE DMA EXT
SET MAX ADDRESS EXT
WRITE MULTIPLE EXT
READ LOG EXT
V
V
V
V
READ VERIFY SECTOR(S)
EXT
V
V
V
V
V
FLUSH CACHE EXT
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
WRITE MULTIPLE FUA EXT
WRITE DMA FUA EXT
READ FP DMA QUEUED
WRITE FP DMA QUEUED
V
V
V
V: Valid on this command
*1: See the command descriptions.
*
For a description of each bit in the Error field and Status field,
see Section 5.2.4.
C141-E249
5-169
Interface
5.4 Command Protocol
The host should confirm that the BSY bit of the Shadow Block Status register of
the device is 0 prior to issue a command. If BSY bit is 1, the host should wait for
issuing a command until BSY bit is cleared to 0.
Commands can be executed only when the DRDY bit of the Status register is 1.
However, the following commands can be executed even if DRDY bit is 0.
•
•
EXECUTE DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC
INITIALIZE DEVICE PARAMETERS
Note: Each FIS type is referred to as follows in this section.
FIS (Frame Information Structure) type
Abbreviation
RegHD
RegDH
Register - Host to Device
Register - Device to Host
DMA Active - Device to Host
DMA Active
DMA Setup
DMA Setup - Device to Host or Host to Device
(Bidirectional)
Set Device Bits - Device to Host
BIST Active - Bidirectional
PIO Setup - Device to Host
SetDB
BIST Active
PIO Setup
Data - Host to Device or Device to Host (Bidirectional) DATA
5.4.1 Non-data command protocol
Execution of the following commands does not involve data transfer between the
host and the device.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
RECALIBRATE
SEEK
READ VERIFY SECTOR(S) (EXT)
EXECUTE DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC
INITIALIZE DEVICE PARAMETERS
SET FEATURES
SET MULTIPLE MODE
SET MAX ADDRESS (EXT)
5-170
C141-E249
5.4 Command Protocol
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS (EXT)
IDLE
IDLE (UNLOAD) IMMEDIATE
STANDBY
STANDBY IMMEDIATE
CHECK POWER MODE
SMART DISABLE OPERATION
SMART ENABLE/DISABLE AUTOSAVE
SMART ENABLE OPERATION
SMART EXECUTE OFFLINE IMMEDIATE
SMART RETURN STATUS
SECURITY ERASE PREPARE
SECURITY FREEZE LOCK
FLUSH CACHE (EXT)
SLEEP
DEVICE CONFIGRATION RESTORE (FREEZE LOCK)
The following is the protocol for command execution without data transfer:
1) The device receives a non-data command with the RegHD FIS.
2) The device executes the received command.
3) Command execution is completed.
4) The device reports the completion of command execution by sending to the
host the RegDH FIS with 1 set in the I bit.
RegHD
Host
Device
RegDH
Figure 5.13 Non-data command protocol
C141-E249
5-171
Interface
5.4.2 PIO data-in command protocol
Execution of the following commands involves data transfers from the device to
the host system:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
IDENTIFY DEVICE
READ SECTOR(S) (EXT)
READ MULTI (EXT)
READ BUFFER
SMART READ DATA
SMATR READ LOG SECTOR
READ LOG EXT
DEVICE CONFIGRATION IDENTIFY
Data of one or more sectors is transferred from the device to the host.
An outline of this protocol is as follows:
1) The device receives a PIO data-in command with the RegHD FIS.
2) If an error remaining in the device prevents command execution, the device
sends the RegDH FIS with 1 set in the I bit.
3) When the device is ready to send data, it sets 0 in the BSY bit, 1 in the DRQ
bit, and 1 in the I bit of the Status field of the PIO Setup FIS, then sends this
FIS to the host. At this time, if the requested data is read from the last sector
to be processed, the device sets 0 in both the BSY bit and DRQ bit of the
E_Status field. Otherwise, the device sets 1 in the BSY bit and 0 in the DRQ
bit of the E_Status field.
4) The device sends the DATA FIS to the host.
5) When all data has been transferred, command execution is completed. If any
data remains to be transferred, this protocol is repeated starting from step 3).
(The maximum data size is 8 KB.)
5-172
C141-E249
5.4 Command Protocol
RegHD
PIO Setup
DATA
Host
Device
Figure 5.14 PIO data-in command protocol
5.4.3 PIO data-out command protocol
Execution of the following commands involves data transfers from the host system
to the device:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
WRITE SECTOR(S) (EXT)
WRITE MULTI (EXT) (FUA EXT)
WRITE BUFFER
WRITE VERIFY
SMART WRITE LOG SECTOR
SECURITY DISABLE PASSWORD
SECURITY ERASE UNIT
SECURITY SET PASSWORD
SECURITY UNLOCK
DOWNLOAD MICROCODE
WRITE LOG EXT
DEVICE CONFIGRATION SET
Data of one or more sectors is transferred from the host to the device.
C141-E249
5-173
Interface
An outline of this protocol is as follows:
1) The device receives a PIO data-out command with the RegHD FIS.
2) If an error remaining in the device prevents command execution, the device
sends the RegDH FIS with 1 set in the I bit.
3) When the device is ready to receive data, it sets 0 in the BSY bit and 1 in the
DRQ bit of the Status field of the PIO Setup FIS. At this time, the device sets
0 in the I bit of the Status field of the PIO Setup FIS for a data transfer to the
first sector, while it sets 1 in the I bit for a data transfer to any sector other
than the first sector. Then, it sends this FIS to the host. In the E_Status field,
the device sets 1 in the BSY bit and 0 in the DRQ bit.
4) The device receives the DATA FIS from the host.
5) When all data has been transferred, the device sends the RegDH FIS (with 1
set in the I bit) to complete execution of the command. If the device has an
error, it reports the error. If any data remains to be received by the device,
this protocol is repeated starting from step 3). (The maximum data size is 8
KB.)
RegHD
PIO Setup
Host
Device
DATA
RegDH
Figure 5.15 PIO data-out command protocol
5-174
C141-E249
5.4 Command Protocol
5.4.4 DMA data-in command protocol
DMA data-in commands include the following commands:
•
READ DMA (EXT)
IDENTFY DEVICE
IDENTFY DEVICE DMA
•
•
The DMA mechanism transfers data of more than one block from the device to the
host. The completion of a command is reported by an interruption.
An outline of this protocol is as follows:
1) The device receives a DMA data-in command with the RegHD FIS.
2) If an error remaining in the device prevents command execution, the device
sends the RegDH FIS with 1 set in the I bit.
3) When the device is ready to send data, it sends the Data FIS to the host.
4) When all data has been transferred, the device sends the RegDH FIS (with 1
set in the I bit) to complete execution of the command. If any data remains to
be sent by the device, this protocol is repeated starting from step 3). (The
maximum data size is 8 KB.)
RegHD
Host
Device
DATA
RegDH
Figure 5.16 DMA data-in command protocol
C141-E249
5-175
Interface
5.4.5 DMA data-out command protocol
The DMA data-out command is the following command:
WRITE DMA (EXT) (FUA EXT)
•
The DMA mechanism transfers data of more than one block from the host to the
device. The completion of the command is reported by an interruption.
An outline of this protocol is as follows:
1) The device receives the DMA data-out command with the RegHD FIS.
2) If an error remaining in the device prevents command execution, the device
sends the RegDH FIS with 1 set in the I bit.
3) When the device is ready to receive data, it sends the DMA Active FIS to the
host.
4) The device receives the Data FIS from the host.
5) When all data has been transferred, the device sends the RegDH FIS (with 1
set in the I bit) to complete execution of the command. If any data remains to
be received by the device, this protocol is repeated starting from step 3). (The
maximum data size is 8 KB.)
RegHD
DMA Active
Host
Device
DATA
RegDH
Figure 5.17 DMA data-out command protocol
5-176
C141-E249
5.4 Command Protocol
5.4.6 Native Command Queuing protocol
Native Queued commands include the following commands:
READ FP DMA QUEUED
WRITE FP DMA QUEUED
An outline of the command queuing protocol is as follows:
1) After the device receives a Native Queued command, if the command is
executable, the device sends to the host the RegDH FIS with the settings of I
bit = 0, BSY bit = 0, and DRQ bit = 0, and it places the command in the
command queue. Otherwise, the device sends the RegDH FIS to the host to
report an error.
2) If the device receives a command that is not a Native Queued command
during command queuing, the device sends to the host the RegDH FIS with
the settings of ERR bit = 1, I bit = 1, BSY bit = 0, DRQ bit = 0, and Error
register = 0x04 to report an abort.
3) When the device is ready to send data for the data transfer of the READ FP
DMA QUEUED command, it sends to the host the DMA Setup FIS with the
settings of TAG = #, D bit = 1, I bit = 0, and A bit = 0, and it then sends the
Data FIS to the host. (The Data FIS is transferred in units of up to 8 KB).
4) When the read data transfer requested by the command is completed and the
command is completed normally, the bit in the SActive field in the SetDB FIS
corresponding to the tag number of the completed command is set by the
device, and the device sets 0 in the Err bit and 0 in the Error register in the Set
Device Bits FIS. Then, it sends the Set Device Bits FIS to the host.
5) For the data transfer of the WRITE FP DMA QUEUED command, if the
DMA Setup Auto Activate function is disabled, the device sends to the host
the DMA Setup FIS with the settings of TAG = #, D bit = 0, A bit = 0, and I
bit = 0, and it sends the DMA Active FIS before it receives the Data FIS from
the host. (The Data FIS is transferred in units of up to 8 KB, with the actual
length of the Data FIS varying depending on the host).
6) If the DMA Setup AutoActivate function is enabled, the device sends to the
host the DMA Setup FIS with the settings of TAG = #, D bit = 0, A bit = 1,
and I bit = 0, and it then receives the Data FIS from the host (in units of 8 KB,
16 sectors).
7) When the write data transfer requested by the command is completed and the
command is completed normally, the bit in the SActive field in the SetDB FIS
corresponding to the tag number of the completed command is set by the
device, and the device sets 0 in the Err bit and 0 in the Error register in the Set
Device Bits FIS. Then, it sends the Set Device Bits FIS to the host. (The
DMA Setup AutoActivate function can be enabled and disabled by the SET
FEATURES command. The function is disabled by default.)
C141-E249
5-177
Interface
8) If an uncorrectable error occurs during command queuing, the device sends to
the host the Set Device Bits FIS with the settings of ERR bit = 1, ERRReg =
ATAErrCode, I bit = 1, and SActive = 0 to report an error.
9) After reporting the error, the device accepts only the READ LOG EXT
command with page 10h specified and the reset requests (SoftReset and
COMRESET). The device reports abort for other commands.
10) If the device receives the READ LOG EXT command with page 10h
specified, queued commands are aborted. Then, after the device sends to the
host the SetDB FIS (ERR = 0, ERRReg = 0, I = 0, and SActive
=0xFFFFFFFF), it sends to the host the log data for the READ LOG EXT
command with page 10h specified and reports the status of this command.
Next, the command queuing function is enabled, and commands can be
accepted again.
RegHD
Host
Device
RegDH
DMA Setup
DATA
SetDB
Figure 5.18 READ FP DMA QUEUED command protocol
5-178
C141-E249
5.4 Command Protocol
RegHD
RegDH
Host
Device
DMA Setup
DMACT
DATA
SetDB
Figure 5.19 WRITE FP DMA QUEUED command protocol
C141-E249
5-179
Interface
5.5 Power-on and COMRESET
Figure 5.20 shows the power-on sequence, and Figure 5.21 shows the
COMRESET sequence.
Immediately after power-on or COMRESET, the host sets 0x7Fh in the Status
field of the Shadow Block Register and 0xFFh in other fields. After the power-on
sequence shown below and after communication with the SATA interface is
established, the host sets 0xFFh in the Status field of the Shadow Block Register.
The device completes the power-on sequence within 10 ms so that communication
with the SATA interface can be established.
Host
power
on
Host
releases
ComReset
Host
ComWake
Host
Align
Host
power
off
Host
releases
ComWake
Host
calibrate
Host
ComReset
Host
data
Host TX
(Device
RX)
Device
TX (Host
RX)
Device
Calibrate
Device
ComInit
Device
Align
Device
power
off
Device
data
Device
releases
ComInit
Device
ComWake
Device
power
on
Figure 5.20 Power-on sequence
5-180
C141-E249
5.5 Power-on and COMRESET
Host
Host
releases
ComReset
Host/device
on
releases
ComWake
Host
calibrate
Host
Align
Host
ComReset
Host
ComWake
Host
data
Host TX
(Device RX)
Device TX
(Host RX)
Device
ComInit
Device
ComWake
Device
data
Device
releases
ComInit
Device
Calibrate
Device
Align
Figure 5.21 COMRESET sequence
C141-E249
5-181
This page is intentionally left blank.
CHAPTER 6 Operations
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
Reset and Diagnosis
Power Save
Power Save Controlled by Interface Power Management (IPM)
Read-ahead Cache
Write Cache
This chapter explains each of the above operations.
C141-E249
6-1
Operations
6.1 Reset and Diagnosis
This section explains the device responses to power-on and an accepted reset.
6.1.1 Response to power-on
Immediately after power is turned on, the host sets 0x7Fh in the Status field of the
Shadow Block and 0xFFh in other fields. After communication with the SATA
interface is established, the host sets 0xFFh in the Status field of the Shadow
Block. The device establishes communication with the SATA interface (PHY
Ready) within 10 ms. The device sends the FIS (STS = 50h) to notify the host that
the device is ready.
Note: Figure 6.1 assumes that power is turned on after the power-off state
continued for more than five seconds.
Figure 6.1 Response to power-on (when the host is powered
on earlier than the device)
6-2
C141-E249
6.1 Reset and Diagnosis
Figure 6.2 Response to power-on (when the device is powered on
earlier than the host)
C141-E249
6-3
Operations
6.1.2 Response to COMRESET
The response to COMRESET is almost the same as the response when power is
turned on and a power-on reset is then cancelled. The device establishes
communication with the SATA interface (PHY Ready) and sends the RegDH FIS
(STS = 50h) to notify the host that the device is ready. Then, the COMRESET
sequence is completed.
Figure 6.3 Response to COMRESET
6-4
C141-E249
6.1 Reset and Diagnosis
6.1.2.1 Software settings preservation
When a device is enumerated, software will configure the device using SET
FEATURES and other commands. These software settings are often preserved
across software reset but not necessarily across hardware reset. In Parallel ATA,
only commanded hardware resets can occur, thus legacy software only reprograms
settings that are cleared for the particular type of reset it has issued. In Serial ATA,
COMRESET is equivalent to hard reset and a non-commanded COMRESET may
occur if there is an asynchronous loss of signal. Since COMRESET is equivalent
to hardware reset, in the case of an asynchronous loss of signal some software
settings may be lost without legacy software knowledge. In order to avoid losing
important software settings without legacy driver knowledge, the software settings
reservation ensures that the value of important software settings is maintained
across a COMRESET. Software settings preservation may be enabled or disabled
using SET FEATURES with a subcommand code of 06h (refer to Section 5.3.2
(28)). If a device supports software settings preservation, the feature shall be
enabled by default.
6.1.2.2 COMRESET preservation requirements
The software settings that shall be preserved across COMRESET are listed below.
The device is only required to preserve the indicated software setting if it supports
the particular feature/command the setting is associated with.
•
INITIALIZE DEVICE PARAMETERS
Device settings established with the INITIALIZE DEVICE PARAMETERS
command.
•
•
Power Management Feature Set Standby Timer
The Standby timer used in the Power Management feature set.
Security mode state
The security mode state established by Security Mode feature set commands
(refer to Section 6.13 of the ATA/6 specification). The device shall not
transition to a different security mode state based on a COMRESET. For
example, the device shall not transition from the SEC5: Unlocked / not
Frozen state to state SEC4: Security enabled /Locked when a COMRESET
occurs, instead the device shall remain in the SEC5: Unlocked /not Frozen
state.
•
•
SECURITY FREEZE LOCK
The Frozen mode setting established by the SECURITY FREEZE LOCK
command.
SECURITY UNLOCK
The unlock counter that is decremented as part of a failed SECURITY
UNLOCK command attempt.
C141-E249
6-5
Operations
•
•
•
•
SET ADDRESS MAX (EXT)
The maximum LBA specified in SET MAX ADDRESS or SET MAX
ADDRESS EXT.
SET FEATURES (Write Cache Enable/Disable)
The write cache enable/disable setting established by the SET FEATURES
command with subcommand code of 02h or 82h.
SET FEATURES (Set Transfer Mode)
PIO, Multiword, and UDMA transfer mode settings established by the SET
FEATURES command with subcommand code of 03h.
SET FEATURES (Advanced Power Management Enable/Disable)
The advanced power anagement enable/disable setting established by the SET
FEATURES command with subcommand code of 05h or 85h. The advanced
power management level established in the Sector Count field when advanced
power management is enabled (SET FEATURES subcommand code 05h)
shall also be preserved.
•
SET FEATURES (Read Look-Ahead)
The read look-ahead enable/disable setting established by the SET
FEATURES command with subcommand code of 55h or AAh.
•
•
SET MULTIPLE MODE
The block size established with the SET MULTIPLE MODE command.
SET FEATURES (Write-Read-Verify feature set)
The Write-Read-Verify enable/disable setting established by the SET
FEATURES command with subcommand code of 0b h/8b h.
6-6
C141-E249
6.1 Reset and Diagnosis
6.1.3 Response to a software reset
When a software reset is accepted, the device performs a self-diagnosis, and it
sends the RegDH FIS (STS = 50h) to notify the host that the device is ready.
Then, the software reset sequence is completed.
Figure 6.4 Response to a software reset
C141-E249
6-7
Operations
6.2 Power Save
The host can change the power consumption state of the device by issuing a power
command to the device.
6.2.1 Power save mode
There are five types of power consumption state of the device including active
mode where all circuits are active.
•
•
•
•
•
Active mode
Active idle mode
Low power idle mode
Standby mode
Sleep mode
The device enters the active idle mode by itself. The device also enters the idle
mode in the same way after power-on sequence is completed. The subsequent
mode transition changes depending on the APM setting.
(1) Active mode
In this mode, all the electric circuit in the device are active or the device is under
seek, read or write operation.
A device enters the active mode under the following conditions:
•
The media access system is received.
(2) Active idle mode
In this mode, circuits on the device is set to power save mode.
The device enters the Active idle mode under the following conditions:
•
After completion of the command execution other than SLEEP and STANDBY
commands.
(3) Low power idle mode
Sets circuits on the device to the power save mode. The heads are disabled in the
safe state.
The device enters the low power mode under the following conditions:
•
After certain amount of time has elapsed in the active idle state (APM Mode
0, Mode 1 and Mode 2)
•
Upon completion of the power-on sequence
6-8
C141-E249
6.2 Power Save
•
•
Upon receipt of a COMRESET
Upon receipt of Idle/Idle Intermediate
(4) Standby mode
In this mode, the spindle motor has stopped from the low power idle state.
The device can receive commands through the interface. However if a command
with disk access is issued, response time to the command under the standby mode
takes longer than the active, active idle, or low power idle mode because the
access to the disk medium cannot be made immediately.
The drive enters the standby mode under the following conditions:
•
•
A STANDBY or STANDBY IMMEDIATE command is issued.
A certain amount of time has elapsed in the low power idle state.
(APM Mode 2)
•
The time specified by the STANDBY or IDLE command has elapsed after
completion of the command.
•
A reset is issued in the sleep mode.
When one of following commands is issued, the command is executed normally
and the device is still stayed in the standby mode.
•
•
•
•
•
Reset (hardware or software)
STANDBY command
STANDBY IMMEDIATE command
INITIALIZE DEVICE PARAMETERS command
CHECK POWER MODE command
(5) Sleep mode
The power consumption of the drive is minimal in this mode. The drive enters
only the standby mode from the sleep mode. The only method to return from the
standby mode is to execute a software or COMRESET.
The drive enters the sleep mode under the following condition:
•
A SLEEP command is issued.
In this mode, the device does not accept the command. (It is ignored.)
C141-E249
6-9
Operations
6.2.2 Power commands
The following commands are available as power commands.
IDLE
IDLE IMMEDIATE
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
STANDBY
STANDBY IMMEDIATE
SLEEP
CHECK POWER MODE
SET FEATURES (APM setting)
6-10
C141-E249
6.3 Power Save Controlled by Interface Power Management (IPM)
6.3 Power Save Controlled by Interface Power Management (IPM)
The host system can change the power consumption status of the interface by
issuing the PARTIAL or SLUMBER request to the device.
6.3.1 Power save mode of the interface
The interface power consumption states of this device can be separated into the
following three modes, including the Active mode where the device is in the active
state:
•
Active mode
•
Partial mode (shallow Interface Power Down)
Slumber mode (deep Interface Power Down)
•
*
The relationship of amount of power consumption in each mode is: Active
mode > Partial mode > Slumber mode. The following table specifies a rule
about the period in which the device must switch to Active mode from the
Interface Power Down state:
Period in which the device must switch to Active mode
Partial mode
Maximum 10 µs
Slumber mode
Maximum 10 ms
(1) Active mode
The interface is in the Active state and commands can be accepted.
(2) Partial mode
In this mode, (shallow) Power Save mode is set for the interface circuit.
The device switches to Partial mode when the following occurs:
•
The device receives the PMREQ_P signal from the host and responds with the
PMACK signal.
•
The device sends the PMREQ_S signal and the host responds with PMACK
signal.
The device cannot switch to Partial mode if the following condition is satisfied:
•
The device responds with the PMNAK signal because it is not waiting for
commands.
The device returns to Active mode from Partial mode when the following
condition is satisfied:
•
The device receives the COMRESET or COMWAKE signal from the host.
C141-E249
6-11
Operations
(3) Slumber mode
In this mode, the (deep) Power Save mode is set for the interface circuit.
The device switches to Slumber mode when the following occurs:
•
The device receives the PMREQ_P signal from the host and responds with the
PMACK signal.
•
The device sends the PMREQ_S signal and the host responds with PMACK
signal.
The device cannot switch to Slumber mode if the following condition is satisfied:
•
The device responds with the PMNAK signal because it is not waiting for
commands.
The device returns to Active mode from Slumber mode when the following
condition is satisfied:
•
The device receives the COMRESET or ComWake signal from the host.
6-12
C141-E249
6.4 Read-ahead Cache
6.4 Read-ahead Cache
Read-ahead Cache is the function for automatically reading data blocks upon
completion of the read command in order to read data from disk media and save
data block on a data buffer.
If a subsequent command requests reading of the read-ahead data, data on the data
buffer can be transferred without accessing the disk media. As the result, faster
data access becomes possible for the host.
6.4.1 Data buffer structure
This device contains a data buffer. This buffer is divided into two areas: one area
is used for MPU work, and the other is used as a read cache for another command.
(See Figure 6.5)
Example of 8 MB buffer
8,192 KB (8,388,608 bytes)
For R/W command
For MPU work
Figure 6.5 Data buffer structure
The read-ahead operation is done by the following commands.
•
•
•
•
READ SECTOR (s) (EXT)
READ MULTIPLE (EXT)
READ DMA (EXT)
READ FP DMA QUEUED
C141-E249
6-13
Operations
6.4.2 Caching operation
The caching operation is performed only when the commands listed below are
received. If any of the following data are stored on the data buffer, the data is sent
to the host system.
•
•
All of the sector data that this command processes.
A part of the sector data including the start sector, that this command
processes.
If part of the data to be processed is stored on the data buffer, the remaining data is
read from disk media and sent to the host system.
(1) Commands that are targets of caching
The commands that are targets of caching are as follows:
•
•
•
•
READ SECTOR (S) (EXT)
READ MULTIPLE (EXT)
READ DMA (EXT)
READ FP DMA QUEUED
However, if the caching function is prohibited by the SET FEATURES command,
the caching operation is not performed.
(2) Data that is a target of caching
The data that is a target of caching are as follows:
1) Read-ahead data that is read from disk media and saved to the data buffer
upon completion of execution of a command that is a target of caching.
2) Pre-read data that is read from disk media and saved to the data buffer before
execution of a command that is a target of caching.
3) Data required by a command that is a target of caching and has been sent to
the host system one. If the sector data requested by the host has not been
completely stored in the read cache portion of the buffer, this data does not
become a target of caching. Also, If sequential hits occur continuously, the
caching-target data required by the host becomes invalid because that data is
overwrited by new data.
6-14
C141-E249
6.4 Read-ahead Cache
(3) Invalidating caching-target data
Data that is a target of caching on the data buffer is invalidated under the
following conditions:
1)-1Any command other than the following commands is issued. (All caching-
target data is invalidated.)
READ BUFFER
WRITE BUFFER
RECALIBRATE
FORMAT TRACK
SET FEATURES
SECURITY ERASE UNIT
DEVICE CONFIGURATION
DOWNLOAD MICROCODE
UNSUPPORT COMMAND (INVALID COMMAND)
1)-2Commands that partially invalidate caching data
READ DMA/READ MULTIPLE/READ SECTOR(S)
READ DMA EXT/READ MULTIPLE EXT/READ SECTOR(S) EXT
READ FP DMA QUEUED
WRITE DMA/WRITE MULTIPLE/WRITE SECTOR(S)
WRITE DMA EXT/WRITE MULTIPLE EXT/WRITE SECTOR(S) EXT
WRITE DMA FUA EXT/WRITE MULTIPLE FUA EXT
WRITE FP DMA QUEUED
SMART
2) A COMRESET is issued or the power is turned off.
3) When HOST CRC ERROR has occurred.
C141-E249
6-15
Operations
6.4.3 Using the read segment buffer
Methods of using the read segment buffer are explained for following situations.
6.4.3.1 Miss-hit
In this situations, the top block of read requested data is not stored at all in the data
buffer. As a result, all of the read requested data is read from disk media.
1) HAP (host address pointer) and DAP (disk address pointer) are defined in the
head of the segment allocated from Buffer. (If pre-read is executed, HAP is
set at the requested data reading position.)
HAP (host address pointer)
Read segment
DAP (disk address pointer)
2) During reading of read requested data, the request data that has already been
read is sent to the host system.
Read requested data is
stored until this point
HAP
Read requested data
Free space
DAP
3) When reading of read requested data is completed and transfer of the read
requested data to the host system is completed, reading of the disk continues
until a certain amount of data is stored.
HAP (stop)
Read requested data
Read-ahead data
DAP
4) The following cache valid data is for the read command that is executed next:
Cache valid data
LAST LBA START LBA
6-16
C141-E249
6.4 Read-ahead Cache
6.4.3.2 Sequential hit
When the read command that is targeted at a sequential address is received after
execution of the read commands is completed, the read command transmits the
Read requested data to the host system continuing read-ahead without newly
allocating the buffer for read.
1) When the sequential read command is received, HAP is set in the sequential
address of the last read command, and DAP is set at a present read position as
it is.
HAP (host address pointer)
Read requested data
Read-ahead data
Cache valid data
Free space
DAP (disk address pointer)
2) During reading of read requested data, the request data that has already been
read is sent to the host system.
HAP (host address pointer)
Cache valid data
Free space
Read requested data
DAP (disk address pointer)
3) When reading of read requested data is completed and transfer of the read
requested data to the host system is completed, the read-ahead operation
continues until a certain amount of data is stored.
HAP (host address pointer)
Read-ahead Free
Cache valid data
Read requested data
data
space
DAP (disk address pointer)
4) The following cache valid data is for the read command that is executed next:
Cache valid data
LAST LBA START LBA
C141-E249
6-17
Operations
6.4.3.3 Full hit
In this situation, all read requested data is stored in the data buffer. Transfer of the
read requested data is started from the location where hit data is stored. For data
that is a target of caching and remains before a full hit, the data is retained when
execution of the command is completed. This is done so that a new read-ahead
operation is not performed. If the full hit command is received during the read-
ahead operation, a transfer of the read requested data starts while the read-ahead
operation is in progress.
1) An example is the state shown below where the previous read command is
executing sequential reading. First, HAP is set at the location where hit data
is stored.
HAP end location of the previous read command
HAP (It is reset to the hit data location for transfers.)
HAP
Cache data
Full hit data
Cache data
DAP
DAP end location of the previous read command
2) The read requested data is transferred, and a new read-ahead operation is not
performed.
HAP
(stop)
Cache data
Full hit data
Cache data
6-18
C141-E249
6.4 Read-ahead Cache
6.4.3.4 Partial hit
In this situation, a part of read requested data including the top sector is stored in
the data buffer. A transfer of the read requested data starts from the address where
the data that is hit is stored until the top sector of the read requested data.
Remaining part of insufficient data is read then.
An example is a case where a partial hit occurs in cache data, as shown below.
Cache valid data
START LBA
LAST LBA
1) HAP is set at the address where partial hit data is stored, and Transfer is
started.
HAP (host address pointer)
Cache valid data
Partial hit data
2) DAP and HAP are set at the head of Buffer newly allocated, and insufficient
data is read.
HAP (host address pointer)
Read segment
DAP (disk address pointer)
3) When reading the read requested data ends and the transmission of the read
requested data to the host system ends, the read-ahead operation continues
until a certain amount of data is stored.
The method of storing the read-ahead data at Partial hit is the same as the
Miss hit.
Cache valid data
LAST LBA START LBA
C141-E249
6-19
Operations
6.5 Write Cache
Write Cache is the function for reducing the command processing time by
separating command control to disk media from write control to disk media.
When Write Cache is permitted, the write command can be keep receiving as long
as the space available for data transfers remains free on the data buffer. Because
of this function, command processing appears to be completed swiftly from the
viewpoint of the host. It improves system throughput.
6.5.1 Cache operation
(1) Command that are targets of caching
The Commands that are targets of caching are as follows:
•
WRITE SECTOR(S) (EXT)
WRITE MULTIPLE (EXT) (FUA)
•
•
•
WRITE DMA (EXT) (FUA)
WRITE FP DMA QUEUED
However, the caching operation is not performed when the caching function is
prohibited by the SET FEATURES command.
(2) Invalidation of cached data
If an error occurs during writing onto media, write processing is repeated up to as
many times as specified for retry processing. If retry fails for a sector because the
retry limit is reached, automatic alternate sector processing is executed for the
sector. If the automatic alternate sector processing fails, the data in the sector for
which automatic alternate sector processing failed is invalidated without being
guaranteed.
Moreover, when the command (clause 6.4.2(3)) is accepted and HOST CRC Error
is generated, the cashing data is invalidated.
<Exception>
•
If a COMRESET, a software reset or command is received while a transfer of
one sector of data is in progress, data is not written in the sector of the media
where the interruption occurred, and sectors accepted before interruption
occurred is written in the medium.
6-20
C141-E249
6.5 Write Cache
(3) Status report in the event of an error
The status report concerning an error occurring during writing onto media is
created when the next command is issued. Where the command reporting the
error status is not executed, only the error status is reported. Only the status of an
error that occurs during write processing is reported.
<Exceptions>
The error status is not reported in the following case:
•
The COMRESET or software reset is received after an error has occurred
during writing to media.
→ The COMRESET or software reset processing is performed as usual.
The error status that has occurred during writing to media is not reported.
(4) Enabling and disabling
Enabling and disabling of the Write Cache function can be set only with the SET
FEATURES command. The setting does not changed even when the error status
is reported.
The initial setting is stored in the system area of media. System area information
is loaded whenever the power is turned on.
(5) COMRESET and software reset response
When a COMRESET or software reset is received while cached data is stored on
the data buffer, data of the data buffer is written on the media, and reset processing
is then performed. This is true for both a hard reset and soft reset.
(6) Cashing function when power supply is turned on
The cashing function is invalid until Calibration is done after the power supply is
turned on.(about 10 sec) It is effective in Default after that as long as the cashing
function is not invalidly set by the SET FEATURES command.
IMPORTANT
If Write Cache is enabled, there is a possibility that data transferred
from the host with the Write Cache enable command is not completely
written on disk media before the normal end interrupt is issued.
If an unrecoverable error occurs while multiple commands that are
targets of write caching are received, the host has difficulty
determining which command caused the error. (An error report is
not issued to the host if automatic alternating processing for the
error is performed normally.) Therefore, the host cannot execute a
retry for the unrecoverable error while Write Cache is enabled. Be
very careful on this point when using this function.
If a write error occurs, an abort response is sent to all subsequent
commands.
C141-E249
6-21
This page is intentionally left blank.
Glossary
Actuator
AT bus
Head positioning assembly. The actuator consists of a voice coil motor and head
arm. If positions the read-write (R-W) head.
A bus between the host CPU and adapter board
ATA (AT Attachment) standard
The ATA standard is for a PC AT interface regulated to establish compatibility
between products manufactured by different vendors. Interfaces based on this
standard are called ATA interfaces.
BIOS standard for drives
The BIOS standard collectively refers to the parameters defined by the host,
which, for example, include the number of cylinders, the number of heads, and the
number of sectors per track in the drive. The physical specifications of the drive
do not always correspond to these parameters.
The BIOS of a PC AT cannot make full use of the physical specifications of these
drivers. To make the best use of these drives, a BIOS that can handle the standard
parameters of these drives is required.
Command
Commands are instructions to input data to and output data from a drive.
Commands are written in command registers.
Connector (Connector Plug: Host system side)
It means a host receptacle (described in this Glossary), when a drive is connected
to a host system without use an interface cable. In case of use an interface cable
for connecting to a host system, it means the connector plug which consists of
terminals and housing of the cable.
Cover
A lid of DE. It is a metallic part labeled the model name and its revision. This
part is attached to the opposite side from PCBA on the disk drive.
Data block
A data block is the unit used to transfer data. A data block normally indicates a
single sector.
C141-E249
GL-1
Glossary
DE
Disk enclosure. The DE includes the disks, built-in spindle motor, actuator, heads,
and air filter. The DE is sealed to protect these components from dust.
Host receptacle
Host receptacle is a connector type on the host system that the signal segment of
Serial-ATA unifies with the power supply segment.
Master (Device 0)
The master is the first drive that can operate on the AT bus. The master is daisy-
chained with the second drive which can operate in conformity with the ATA
standard.
MTBF
MTTR
Mean time between failures. The MTBF is calculated by dividing the total
operation time (total power-on time) by the number of failures in the disk drive
during operation.
Mean time to repair. The MTTR is the average time required for a service person
to diagnose and repair a faulty drive.
PIO (Programmed input-output)
Mode to transfer data under control of the host CPU
Positioning
Sum of the seek time and mean rotational delay
Power save mode
The power save modes are idle mode, standby mode, and sleep mode.
In idle mode, the drive is neither reading, writing, nor seeking data. In standby
mode, the spindle motor is stopped and circuits other than the interface control
circuit are sleeping. The drive enters sleep mode when the host issues the SLEEP
command.
Reserved
Reserved bits, bytes, and fields are set to zero and unusable because they are
reserved for future standards.
Rotational delay
Time delay due to disk rotation. The mean delay is the time required for half a
disk rotation. The mean delay is the average time required for a head to reach a
sector after the head is positioned on a track.
GL-2
C141-E249
Glossary
Seek time
Serial-ATA
The seek time is the time required for a head to move from the current track to
another track. The seek time does not include the mean rotational delay.
Serial ATA is an extension specification from the current Parallel ATA physical
storage interface. The parallel data transfer of Parallel ATA is changed to the
serial data transfer in Serial-ATA for obtaining greater data transfer speed.
Slave (Device 1)
The slave is a second drive that can operate on the AT bus. The slave is daisy-
chained with the first drive operating in conformity with the ATA standard.
Status
The status is a piece of one-byte information posted from the drive to the host
when command execution is ended. The status indicates the command termination
state.
VCM
Voice coil motor. The voice coil motor is excited by one or more magnets. In this
drive, the VCM is used to position the heads accurately and quickly.
C141-E249
GL-3
This page is intentionally left blank.
Acronyms and Abbreviations
A
I
ABRT Aborted command
AIC Automatic idle control
AMNF Address mark not found
ATA AT attachment
IDNF
ID not found
IRQ14 Interrupt request 14
L
AWG American wire gage
LED
MB
Light emitting diode
B
M
BBK
Bad block detected
Mega-byte
BIOS
Basic input-output system
MB/S Mega-byte per seconds
MPU
Micro processor unit
C
P
CORR Corrected data
CH
CL
CM
CSR
CSS
CY
Cylinder high field
Cylinder low field
Command field
Current sense resistor
Current start/stop
Cylinder field
PCA
PIO
Printed circuit assembly
Programmed input-output
R
RLL
Run-length-limited
RoHS The Restrictions of the use of
certain Hazardous Substances in
electrical and electronic equipment
D
dBA
DE
DH
dB A-scale weighting
Disk enclosure
Device/head field
S
SA
System area
DRDY Drive ready
SATA Serial-ATA
DRQ
DSC
DWF
Data request bit
Drive seek complete
Drive write fault
SC
SG
SN
ST
Sector count field
Signal ground
Sector number field
Status field
E
ECC
ER
ERR
EU
Error checking and correction
Error field
Error
T
TPI
Track per inches
TRONF Track 0 not found
European Union
Typ
Typical
F
U
FR
Feature field
UNC
VCM
Uncorrectable ECC error
H
V
HA
HDD
Host adapter
Hard disk drive
Voice coil motor
C141-E249
AB-1
This page is intentionally left blank.
Index
caching
command for...............................6-14, 6-20
A
data for................................................. 6-14
caching data, invalidating........................ 6-15
caching operation..................................... 6-14
capability, off-line data collection........... 5-64
cashing function at power-on .................. 6-21
caution, handling ....................................... 3-7
CHECK POWER MODE........................ 5-53
checksum...............................5-65, 5-67, 5-69
circuit
controller................................................ 2-3
read/write ............................................... 2-3
circuit configuration ...........................4-3, 4-5
circulation filter ......................................... 2-2
CN1 ......................................................... 3-10
code
command...................................5-29, 5-168
diagnostic............................................. 5-43
command code..............................5-29, 5-168
command code and parameter................. 5-29
command data structure........................... 5-67
command description............................... 5-32
command execution, status after ............. 5-24
command field......................................... 5-28
command for caching .....................6-14, 6-20
command processing during
A/D converter circuit .............................. 4-12
AAM ..................................................... 5-125
acceleration mode ................................... 4-19
acoustic noise .......................................... 1-10
active field............................................... 5-28
active idle mode ........................................ 6-8
active mode ...................................... 6-8, 6-11
actuator............................................... 2-2, 4-2
actuator motor control............................. 4-18
adaptability................................................ 1-2
advanced power management ................ 1-13,
1-14, 5-123
AGC circuit............................................. 4-11
air circulation system ................................ 2-2
air filter...................................................... 4-3
ambient temperature.................................. 3-6
APM............................................. 1-13, 5-123
area, service............................................... 3-7
attribute ID.............................................. 5-61
attribute value
current.................................................. 5-62
raw....................................................... 5-62
worst case ............................................ 5-62
automatic acoustic management ........... 5-125
average positioning time ........................... 1-2
self-calibration ....................................... 4-9
command protocol................................. 5-170
DMA data-in...................................... 5-175
DMA data-out.................................... 5-176
native queued..................................... 5-177
non-data ..................................5-170, 5-171
PIO data-in......................................... 5-172
PIO data-out....................................... 5-173
command, host......................................... 5-29
command, power ..................................... 6-10
communication layer ............................... 5-15
compact ..................................................... 1-2
compensating open loop gain .................... 4-8
COMRESET.......................................... 5-180
COMRESET preservation
B
BIST active - bidirectional...................... 5-20
blower........................................................ 4-3
blower effect ............................................. 2-2
breather, location of .................................. 3-5
burst even1.............................................. 4-17
burst even2.............................................. 4-17
burst odd.................................................. 4-17
busy (BSY) bit ........................................ 5-27
C
cache
read-ahead ........................................... 6-13
write..................................................... 6-20
cache operation ....................................... 6-20
cached data, invalidation of..................... 6-20
requirement............................................ 6-5
COMRESET response............................. 6-21
COMRESET sequence .......................... 5-182
COMRESET, response to.......................... 6-4
C141-E249
IN-1
Index
conceptual layer, conceptual diagram ..... 5-14
condition, installation................................ 3-1
configuration
DEVICE CONFIGURATION
FREEZE LOCK ...................................5-86
DEVICE CONFIGURATION
device..............................................2-1, 2-2
drive system........................................... 2-3
system .................................................... 2-3
connection
IDENTIFY ...........................................5-87
DEVICE CONFIGURATION
IDENTIFY data structure............5-88, 5-89
DEVICE CONFIGURATION
drive....................................................... 2-3
connection to SATA interface................... 1-3
connection with host system...................... 3-9
connector location ..................................... 3-9
connector pinout...................................... 5-10
connector specification
host system .......................................... 3-10
connector, device....................................... 3-9
controller circuit .................................2-3, 4-4
current and power dissipation.................... 1-8
current attribute value.............................. 5-62
current fluctuation (Typ.) at +5 V
when power is turned on........................ 1-9
current LBA under test............................ 5-70
current requirements and power
dissipation.............................................. 1-8
current span under test............................. 5-71
cylinder high field ................................... 5-26
cylinder low field .................................... 5-25
RESTORE............................................5-86
DEVICE CONFIGURATION SET.........5-87
device connector........................................3-9
device control field ..................................5-28
device overview.........................................1-1
device ready (DRDY) bit.........................5-27
device seek complete (DSC) bit...............5-27
device specification ...................................1-4
device write fault (DF) bit .......................5-27
device/head field......................................5-26
device-initiated interface power
management .........................................1-15
device-nitiated power management
interface................................................1-15
diagnosis ....................................................6-2
diagnostic code ...............................5-24, 5-43
digital PLL circuit....................................4-12
dimension...................................................3-2
DIPM .......................................................1-15
disk......................................................2-2, 4-2
disk drive outerview ..................................2-2
disk enclosure ............................................2-2
DMA active - device to host....................5-18
DMA buffer offset field...........................5-28
DMA data-in command protocol...........5-175
DMA data-out command protocol.........5-176
DMA setup - device to host or host to
device (bidirectional) ...........................5-19
DMA transfer count field.........................5-28
DOWNLOAD MICROCODE.................5-45
DOWNLOAD MICROCODE
operation...............................................5-45
drive connection.........................................2-3
drive error logging capability ..................5-64
drive system configuration ........................2-3
driver circuit.............................................4-15
driving ready LED...................................5-11
D
D/A converter (DAC).............................. 4-14
data - host to device or device to host
(bidirectional) ...................................... 5-21
data area................................................... 4-15
data assurance in the event of power
failure................................................... 1-11
data buffer ................................................. 1-3
data buffer structure................................. 6-13
data for caching ....................................... 6-14
data format of
device attribute value........................... 5-60
guarantee failure threshold value......... 5-60
READ LOG EXT log page 10h........ 5-149,
5-150
SMART comprehensive error log........ 5-68
SMART summary error log................. 5-66
data format version number..................... 5-61
data request (DRQ) bit ............................ 5-27
data transfer mode ................................. 5-122
data-surface servo format ........................ 4-15
DE.............................................................. 2-2
device attribute value, data format of...... 5-60
device configuration...........................2-1, 2-2
DEVICE CONFIGURATION ................ 5-85
E
E_status field ...........................................5-28
effect, blower.............................................2-2
electrical specification ...............................5-7
enabling and disabling .............................6-21
environmental protection...........................1-2
environmental specification.......................1-9
IN-2
C141-E249
Index
error (ERR) bit ........................................ 5-27
error correction and retry by ECC............. 1-3
error data structure .................................. 5-67
error field................................................. 5-24
error logging capability........................... 5-64
error posting.......................................... 5-168
error rate.................................................. 1-12
example of model name and product
G
gray code ................................................. 4-17
guarantee failure threshold ...................... 5-65
guarantee failure threshold value,
data format of....................................... 5-60
H
handling caution ........................................ 3-7
head ........................................................... 2-2
high resistance against shock..................... 1-3
high-speed transfer rate ............................. 1-2
HIPM....................................................... 1-15
hit
number................................................... 1-5
EXECUTE DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC ..... 5-43
execution example of READ
MULTIPLE command......................... 5-91
execution timing of self-calibration .......... 4-9
full........................................................ 6-18
partial ................................................... 6-19
sequential ............................................. 6-17
host command.......................................... 5-29
host system
connection.............................................. 3-9
host system connector specification ........ 3-10
host-initiated interface power
management......................................... 1-15
host-initiated power management
interface ............................................... 1-15
hot plug.................................................... 5-13
F
failure prediction capability flag ............. 5-64
feature........................................................ 1-2
feature flag .............................................. 5-71
features field............................................ 5-25
function................................................ 5-56
value .................................................... 5-56
features field =
01h..................................................... 5-138
02h..................................................... 5-140
03h..................................................... 5-141
04h..................................................... 5-142
C0h ...................................................... 5-86
C1h ...................................................... 5-86
C2h ...................................................... 5-87
C3h ...................................................... 5-87
features field value................................ 5-119
filter
circulation.............................................. 2-2
FIR circuit ............................................... 4-12
FIS type................................................... 5-17
flag
failure prediction capability................. 5-64
status.................................................... 5-62
FLUSH CACHE ................................... 5-102
FLUSH CACHE EXT........................... 5-163
FR = D5........................................ 5-83, 5-152
FR = D5h................................................. 5-73
FR = D6.......................................... 5-77, 5-84
frame ......................................................... 3-3
frame information structure (FIS),
I
ID, attribute ............................................. 5-61
identifier and security level,
relationship between ...............5-125, 5-126
IDENTIFY DEVICE............................. 5-104
IDENTIFY DEVICE command,
information to be read by................... 5-106
IDENTIFY DEVICE DMA................... 5-105
IDLE........................................................ 5-51
IDLE IMMEDIATE ................................ 5-48
information to be read by IDENTIFY
DEVICE command............................ 5-106
INITIALIZE DEVICE
PARAMETERS................................... 5-44
inner guard band...................................... 4-15
input voltage.............................................. 1-6
installation ................................................. 3-8
installation condition ................................. 3-1
interface..................................................... 5-1
logical .................................................. 5-14
physical.................................................. 5-2
SATA..................................................... 2-3
interface..................................................... 1-3
interface power management..........1-15, 1-16
interface signal........................................... 5-2
outline of.............................................. 5-17
frame structure, mounting......................... 3-4
frequency characteristic of
programmable filter............................. 4-11
FSN = E0h............................................. 5-160
full hit...................................................... 6-18
function and performance ......................... 1-2
C141-E249
IN-3
Index
invalidating caching data......................... 6-15
invalidation of cached data...................... 6-20
IPM.......................................................... 1-15
operation ....................................................6-1
cache.....................................................6-20
caching .................................................6-14
DOWNLOAD MICROCODE .............5-45
operation to move head to reference
L
cylinder ................................................4-18
orientation..................................................3-3
out of band signaling .................................5-4
outer guard band ......................................4-15
outerview, disk drive .................................2-2
outline ........................................................4-2
outline of
large capacity............................................. 1-2
layer, communication.............................. 5-15
limitation of mounting............................... 3-4
load/unload function................................ 1-12
location of breather.................................... 3-5
location, connector .................................... 3-9
lock function, operation of .........5-125, 5-126
log directory data format......................... 5-65
logical interface....................................... 5-14
low noise and vibration ............................. 1-3
low power idle mode................................. 6-8
frame information structure (FIS) ........5-17
shadow block register...........................5-16
P
P11 function.............................................5-11
PAD .........................................................4-17
parameter ......................................5-29, 5-168
partial hit..................................................6-19
partial mode .............................................6-11
password
master.................................................5-128
user.....................................................5-128
physical Interface.......................................5-2
physical sector servo configuration
M
master password .................................... 5-128
mean time between failure (MTBF)........ 1-11
mean time to repair (MTTR)................... 1-11
measurement point, surface
temperature ............................................ 3-6
media defect ............................................ 1-12
microcode data, example of rewriting..... 5-46
microprocessor unit (MPU)..................... 4-14
miss-hit.................................................... 6-16
mode
on disk surface .....................................4-16
pinout, connector .....................................5-10
PIO data-in command
active.............................................6-8, 6-11
active idle............................................... 6-8
low power idle ....................................... 6-8
partial................................................... 6-11
power save ............................................. 6-8
settable............................................... 5-119
sleep....................................................... 6-9
slumber ................................................ 6-12
standby................................................... 6-9
model and product number........................ 1-5
motor
protocol ...................................5-172, 5-173
PIO data-out command
protocol ...................................5-173, 5-174
PIO setup – device to host .......................5-21
positioning error.......................................1-12
post code..................................................4-17
power amplifier........................................4-14
power command.......................................6-10
power management
interface.......................................1-15, 1-16
power requirement.....................................1-6
power save .................................................6-8
power save controlled by interface
power management (IPM) ...................6-11
power save mode ................................1-2, 6-8
power save mode of interface..................6-11
power supply configuration .......................4-4
power supply pin......................................3-10
power supply segment .............................3-10
power-on cashing function ......................6-21
power-on reset .......................................5-180
power-on sequence ................. 4-6, 4-7, 5-180
power-on, response to................................6-2
spindle.................................................... 2-2
mounting.................................................... 3-3
mounting frame structure .......................... 3-4
mounting limitation................................... 3-4
N
native queued command protocol.......... 5-177
non-data command protocol.......5-170, 5-171
O
off-line data collection capability............ 5-64
off-line data collection status .........5-62, 5-63
IN-4
C141-E249
Index
primitive mnemonic .................................. 5-5
programmable filter circuit ..................... 4-11
protocol, command................................ 5-170
SCT COMMAND SET ................5-77, 5-160
SCT READ DATA.......................5-83, 5-152
SCT STATUS REQUEST............5-73, 5-151
SCT WRITE DATA.....................5-84, 5-161
sector count field ..................................... 5-25
sector number field.................................. 5-25
SECURITY DISABLE PASSWORD... 5-134
SECURITY ERASE PREPARE ........... 5-130
SECURITY ERASE UNIT ................... 5-131
SECURITY FREEZE LOCK................ 5-132
security password, content of ................ 5-134
SECURITY SET PASSWORD............. 5-126
SECURITY SET PASSWORD data,
contents of.......................................... 5-126
SECURITY UNLOCK.......................... 5-128
SEEK....................................................... 5-42
seek operation.......................................... 4-18
selective self-test feature flag .................. 5-71
selective self-test log data structure......... 5-70
selective self-test pending time [min]...... 5-71
self-calibration........................................... 4-8
self-calibration content.............................. 4-8
self-diagnosis............................................. 1-3
self-test execution status.................5-63, 5-69
self-test index .......................................... 5-69
self-test number ....................................... 5-69
sensing and compensating for
external force ......................................... 4-8
sequential hit............................................ 6-17
serial ATA function............................... 5-124
service area................................................ 3-7
service life ............................................... 1-11
servo burst capture circuit ....................... 4-14
servo circuit ............................................... 4-3
servo control............................................ 4-13
servo control circuit................................. 4-13
servo frame format .................................. 4-17
servo mark ............................................... 4-17
set device bits – device to host ................ 5-23
SET FEATURES................................... 5-119
SET MAX.............................................. 5-137
SET MAX ADDRESS .......................... 5-137
SET MAX ADDRESS EXT.................. 5-155
SET MAX FREEZE LOCK .................. 5-142
SET MAX LOCK.................................. 5-140
SET MAX SET PASSWORD............... 5-138
SET MAX UNLOCK............................ 5-141
SET MULTIPLE MODE ........................ 5-95
settable mode......................................... 5-119
shadow block register.............................. 5-24
shadow block register, outline of............. 5-16
shock and vibration.................................. 1-10
shock and vibration specification ............ 1-10
R
raw attribute value................................... 5-62
READ BUFFER.................................... 5-101
read circuit............................................... 4-11
READ DMA ........................................... 5-97
READ DMA EXT................................. 5-144
READ FP DMA QUEUED................... 5-166
READ FP DMA QUEUED
command protocol............................. 5-178
READ LOG EXT.................................. 5-147
READ LOG EXT log page 10h,
data format of ......................... 5-149, 5-150
READ MULTIPLE................................. 5-90
READ MULTIPLE command,
execution example of........................... 5-91
READ MULTIPLE EXT ...................... 5-146
READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS ...... 5-136
READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS
EXT ................................................... 5-145
READ SECTOR (S) EXT..................... 5-143
READ SECTOR(S)................................. 5-34
read segment buffer, using...................... 6-16
READ VERIFY SECTOR (S) EXT ..... 5-162
READ VERIFY SECTOR(S) ................. 5-40
read/write circuit .......................2-3, 4-3, 4-10
read/write circuit block diagram ............. 4-10
read/write preamplifier (PreAMP) .......... 4-10
read-ahead cache..................................... 6-13
read-ahead cache system........................... 1-3
RECALIBRATE ..................................... 5-33
recommended equipment .......................... 3-8
recommended power-off sequence ......... 1-13
register - device to host ........................... 5-18
register - host to device ........................... 5-17
reliability................................................. 1-11
reset........................................................... 6-2
reset response .......................................... 6-21
reset, power-on and COMRESET......... 5-180
response to COMRESET .......................... 6-4
response to power-on ................................ 6-2
response to software reset ......................... 6-7
rewriting microcode data
(384 K bytes ), example of .................. 5-46
ripple ......................................................... 1-6
S
SATA interface ......................................... 2-3
SATA interface cable connection ........... 3-11
C141-E249
IN-5
Index
signal interface regulation ......................... 5-4
signal segment......................................... 3-10
signal, interface ......................................... 5-2
SLEEP..................................................... 5-54
sleep mode................................................. 6-9
slope of an input voltage at rise................. 1-6
slumber mode .......................................... 6-12
SMART................................................... 5-55
SMART command transport (SCT) ........ 5-72
SMART comprehensive error log,
data format of....................................... 5-68
SMART error logging ............................. 5-65
SMART self-test ..................................... 5-68
SMART self-test log data format ............ 5-69
SMART summary error log, data
surface temperature measurement
point .......................................................3-6
surface temperature standard value............3-6
system configuration..................................2-3
T
tag field information ...................5-149, 5-150
temperature range ......................................1-2
temperature, ambient .................................3-6
test span ...................................................5-70
theory of device operation .........................4-1
total number of drive error.......................5-67
track following operation.........................4-18
U
format of .............................................. 5-66
SN = E0h.............................5-73, 5-77, 5-151
SN = E1h................. 5-83, 5-84, 5-152, 5-161
software reset (SRST) ............................. 5-28
software reset response............................ 6-21
software reset, response to......................... 6-7
software settings preservation ................... 6-5
specification .............................................. 1-4
specification summary............................... 1-4
spindle ....................................................... 4-2
spindle motor............................................. 2-2
spindle motor control............................... 4-19
spindle motor control circuit ................... 4-14
spindle motor driver circuit....................... 4-3
stable rotation mode ................................ 4-19
staggered spin-up..................................... 5-11
standard value, surface temperature .......... 3-6
STANDBY.............................................. 5-50
STANDBY IMMEDIAT......................... 5-47
standby mode............................................. 6-9
start mode ................................................ 4-19
status........................................................ 5-67
status after command execution .............. 5-24
status field ............................................... 5-27
status flag................................................. 5-62
status report on error occurrence............. 6-21
status, off-line data collection ................. 5-62
structure, data buffer................................ 6-13
subassembly .............................................. 4-2
subcommand............................................ 5-56
UNLOAD IMMEDIATE.........................5-48
unrecoverable read error..........................1-12
user password.........................................5-128
using read segment buffer........................6-16
V
VCM current sense resistor (CSR) ..........4-15
viterbi detection circuit............................4-12
W
worst case attribute value.........................5-62
WRITE BUFFER...................................5-103
write cache........................................1-3, 6-20
write circuit..............................................4-10
WRITE DMA ..........................................5-99
WRITE DMA EXT................................5-154
WRITE DMA FUA EXT.......................5-165
WRITE FP DMA QUEUED..................5-167
WRITE FP DMA QUEUED
command protocol..............................5-179
WRITE LOG EXT.................................5-158
WRITE MULTIPLE................................5-93
WRITE MULTIPLE EXT .....................5-157
WRITE MULTIPLE FUA EXT ............5-164
write precompensation.............................4-10
WRITE SECTOR (S) EXT....................5-153
WRITE SECTOR(S) ...............................5-36
WRITE VERIFY .....................................5-38
write/read recovery ..................................4-17
write-read-verify feature........................5-125
IN-6
C141-E249
Comment Form
We would appreciate your comments and suggestions regarding this manual.
Manual code
Manual name
C141-E249-01EN
MHW2120BS, MHW2100BS, MHW2080BS, MHW2060BS, MHW2040BS
DISK DRIVES PRODUCT MANUAL
Please mark each item: E(Excellent), G(Good), F(Fair), P(Poor).
General appearance
Technical level
Organization
Clarity
(
(
(
(
(
)
)
)
)
)
Illustration
Glossary
Acronyms & Abbreviations
Index
(
(
(
(
)
)
)
)
Accuracy
Comments & Suggestions
List any errors or suggestions for improvement.
Page
Line
Contents
Please send this form to the address below. We will use your comments in planning future editions.
Address: Fujitsu Learning Media Limited
37-10 Nishikamata 7-chome
Oota-ku
Tokyo 144-0051
JAPAN
Fax: 81-3-3730-3702
Organization:
Name:
C141-E249-01EN
This page is intentionally left blank.
MHW2120BS, MHW2100BS, MHW2080BS, MHW2060BS, MHW2040BS
DISK DRIVES PRODUCT MANUAL
C141-E249-01EN
MHW2120BS, MHW2100BS, MHW2080BS, MHW2060BS, MHW2040BS
DISK DRIVES PRODUCT MANUAL
C141-E249-01EN
|